Affinity Service Manual Rev7

Artwork and Signature File for:
9-500-0255 “MANUAL, AFFINITY SERVICE”
Artwork consists of:
• Two hundred and thirty-four (234) 8 ½ inch x 11 inch pages.
REV AUTHORED BY DATE

J. SHARP 8/25/06
REV DRAFTED BY DATE
DANBURY, CT 06810
B. MOSES 8/25/06
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION: TITLE DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
The content of this document is the
exclusive property of Lorad and may MANUAL, AFFINITY AW-00227 007
not, without prior written permission
of Lorad, be reproduced, copied or SERVICE
used for any purpose whatsoever. ARTWORK SIZE A SHEET 1 OF 1
ENG-0034-T33, Rev. 001
Service Manual
for Affinity Series Mammography Systems
Part Number 9-500-0255
Revision 007
Service Manual
for Affinity Series Mammography Systems
Part Number 9-500-0255

Revision 005
Service Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ................................................................................................. -i

List of Figures .......................................................................................................-v
List of Tables ......................................................................................................-vii
Preface ..............................................................................................................P-ix
1.0 Using the Service Manual ...................................................................................................... P-ix
2.0 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ..............................................................................................P-x
3.0 International Symbols ............................................................................................................. P-x
4.0 Acronym and Abbreviation List .............................................................................................P-xi
Chapter 1: General Information ........................................................................ 1-1
1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Intended Uses ..................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Required Tools and Equipment ........................................................................................1-2
2.0 Safety .....................................................................................................................................1-3
2.1 Electrical Safety ................................................................................................................1-3
2.2 Mechanical Safety ............................................................................................................1-4
2.3 Radiation Safety ...............................................................................................................1-4
2.4 Isolation Integrity .............................................................................................................1-4
2.5 Interlocks .........................................................................................................................1-5
2.6 External Indicators ............................................................................................................1-5
3.0 System Description .................................................................................................................1-6
3.1 Gantry and C-Arm ............................................................................................................1-6
3.2 Control Panel ...................................................................................................................1-8
4.0 Compliance Data ...................................................................................................................1-9
4.1 Compliance Statement .....................................................................................................1-9
4.2 Certifiable Components ..................................................................................................1-10
4.3 Location of Labels ..........................................................................................................1-11
Chapter 2: System Installation ........................................................................... 2-1
1.0 Room Planning .......................................................................................................................2-1
2.0 Unpacking Instructions ...........................................................................................................2-2
2.1 Receiving Instructions ......................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Uncrating the System .......................................................................................................2-2
3.0 System Installation ..................................................................................................................2-4
3.1 Input Power Configuration ...............................................................................................2-4
3.2 Power Cable Connection .................................................................................................2-5
3.3 Remote X-ray On/Power On Light Connection .................................................................2-6
3.4 Control Panel Installation .................................................................................................2-8
3.5 Securing System in Position ............................................................................................2-10
3.6 Installing the System Accessories ....................................................................................2-10
3.7 Initial Startup Procedures ...............................................................................................2-13
3.8 Final Operational Setup .................................................................................................2-14
P/N 9-500-0255 i
Service Manual
Chapter 3: Functional Tests/Setting Defaults ..................................................... 3-1

1.0 Controls and Indicators .......................................................................................................... 3-1
2.0 System Startup ....................................................................................................................... 3-2
2.1 Pre-Startup Inspections .................................................................................................... 3-2
2.2 Startup Sequence ............................................................................................................. 3-2
2.3 Post-Startup Tests ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.0 The Affinity Series Control Panel ............................................................................................ 3-7
3.1 Control Panel Screens ...................................................................................................... 3-8
4.0 Setting User Defaults ............................................................................................................ 3-14
5.0 Setting Exposure Technique Defaults ................................................................................... 3-15
Chapter 4: Calibrations and Performance Tests ................................................. 4-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
2.0 Calibration Procedures ........................................................................................................... 4-1
2.1 Entering Calibration Mode ............................................................................................... 4-2
3.0 Compression System Calibration Procedures .......................................................................... 4-7
3.1 Compression Force Calibration ........................................................................................ 4-7
3.2 Compression Thickness Calibration ................................................................................. 4-8
4.0 Exposure System Calibration .................................................................................................. 4-9
4.1 Tube Voltage Calibration ................................................................................................. 4-9
4.2 Test mA Calibration ....................................................................................................... 4-12
4.3 Filament Current (mA) Calibration ................................................................................. 4-12
4.4 Backup Timer Test ......................................................................................................... 4-17
5.0 Automatic Exposure Control System Calibration .................................................................. 4-19
5.1 AEC Detector Gain Calibration ...................................................................................... 4-20
5.2 AEC Detect Board—R1 Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-20
5.3 Initial Calibration—Large Focal Spot (Mo) ..................................................................... 4-21
5.4 kV Tracking—Large Focal Spot (Mo) .............................................................................. 4-22
5.5 Initial Calibration—Large Focal Spot (Rh) ...................................................................... 4-22
5.6 kV Tracking—Large Focal Spot (Rh) ............................................................................... 4-23
5.7 Starting AEC Values—Large Focal Spot .......................................................................... 4-23
5.8 Performance Test—Large Focal Spot (Mo) ..................................................................... 4-24
5.9 Performance Test—Large Focal Spot (Rh) ...................................................................... 4-25
5.10 Initial Calibration—Small Focal Spot (Mo) ................................................................... 4-26
5.11 kV Tracking - Small Focal Spot (Mo) ............................................................................ 4-27
5.12 Initial Calibration—Small Focal Spot (Rh) .................................................................... 4-27
5.13 Starting AEC Values - Small Focal Spot ........................................................................ 4-28
5.14 Performance Test - Small Spot (Mo) ............................................................................. 4-29
5.15 Performance Test - Small Spot (Rh) .............................................................................. 4-30
5.16 HTC Factor (Offset) Calibration ................................................................................... 4-31
5.17 Large Bucky (24 x 30 cm) Factor Calibration ............................................................... 4-32
5.18 Compression Thickness Threshold Adjustment ............................................................ 4-33
5.19 C-arm Safety Function Test .......................................................................................... 4-35
ii P/N 9-500-0255
Service Manual
6.0 Performance Tests ................................................................................................................4-36

6.1 Half-Value Layer ............................................................................................................4-36
6.2 Reproducibility and Linearity in Manual Mode ..............................................................4-39
6.3 Reproducibility in Auto-Time Mode ...............................................................................4-40
6.4 Reproducibility in Auto-kV Mode ...................................................................................4-41
6.5 Reproducibility in Auto-Filter Mode ...............................................................................4-41
6.6 Bucky Device Performance Test .....................................................................................4-44
6.7 AEC Limits Performance Test ..........................................................................................4-45
6.8 System Level Functional Test ..........................................................................................4-45
6.9 Optical Density (Users Preference) Verification ..............................................................4-45
6.10 IRSD Leakage Test ........................................................................................................4-46
6.11 X-ray Tubehead Leakage Test .......................................................................................4-47
7.0 X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment Procedures ...........................................................4-48
7.1 X-ray Beam Alignment Template ....................................................................................4-48
7.2 Exposing and Viewing the X-ray Field ............................................................................4-49
7.3 Aperture Adjustment Procedures ....................................................................................4-49
7.4 Auto-Aperture Alignment ...............................................................................................4-52
7.5 Magnification Full Field (18 x 24 cm) Aperture Alignment (SM FS) .................................4-54
7.6 10 cm Coned-down Contact Aperture Alignment (LG FS) ...............................................4-55
7.7 7.5 cm Spot Contact Aperture Alignment (LG FS) ...........................................................4-55
7.8 7.5 cm Spot Magnification Aperture Alignment (SM FS) .................................................4-55
7.9 X-ray Field Alignment Verification .................................................................................4-55
7.10 Light Field Alignment Test and Adjustment ..................................................................4-56
7.11 Light Field Edge Contrast Test .......................................................................................4-58
7.12 Light Field Illuminance Test .........................................................................................4-59
8.0 Mechanical Adjustments ......................................................................................................4-61
8.1 Compression Chain Tension Adjustment ........................................................................4-61
8.2 Compression Thickness Potentiometer Adjustment .........................................................4-62
8.3 Compression Force Load Cell Setting .............................................................................4-63
8.4 C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board Calibration/Vertical Drive Force Load Cell Setting ..4-63
9.0 kV Control Offset Calibration ...............................................................................................4-64
Chapter 5: Maintenance—General .................................................................... 5-1
1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................................................5-1
2.0 Preventive Maintenance .........................................................................................................5-1
3.0 Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................................5-3
3.1 Theory of Operation Overview ........................................................................................5-3
3.2 Alert Codes Log ..............................................................................................................5-10
3.3 System Data Retrieval ....................................................................................................5-12
P/N 9-500-0255 iii

Service Manual
Chapter 6: Maintenance—Remove and Replace Procedures ............................. 6-1

1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 6-1
2.0 Gantry Components—Remove and Replace ........................................................................... 6-2
2.1 Removing Covers and Panels From the Gantry ................................................................ 6-3
2.2 Gantry Cover Components .............................................................................................. 6-7
2.3 Control Panel Components .............................................................................................. 6-9
2.4 Left-Side Gantry Components ........................................................................................ 6-12
2.5 Right-Side Gantry Components ...................................................................................... 6-18
2.6 Internal Gantry Components .......................................................................................... 6-22
3.0 C-Arm Components—Remove and Replace ......................................................................... 6-28
3.1 C-Arm Frame Components ............................................................................................ 6-32
3.2 Tubehead Components .................................................................................................. 6-39
3.3 Compression Assembly .................................................................................................. 6-51
3.4 IRSD Components ......................................................................................................... 6-60
Chapter 7: Parts List ........................................................................................... 7-1
1.0 Instructions ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
1.1 The Replacement Parts Lists ............................................................................................. 7-1
Appendix A—Specifications ...............................................................................A-1
1.0 System Requirements and Dimensions ...................................................................................A-1
1.1 Electrical Input ................................................................................................................A-1
1.2 Operating Environment ...................................................................................................A-1
1.3 Storage Environment ........................................................................................................A-1
1.4 Room Requirements ........................................................................................................A-2
1.5 System Dimensions .........................................................................................................A-2
2.0 C-arm, Compression, and IRSD ..............................................................................................A-3
2.1 C-arm ..............................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Compression ...................................................................................................................A-3
2.3 Image Receptor Support Device ......................................................................................A-4
3.0 X-ray System ..........................................................................................................................A-5
3.1 Automatic Exposure Control ............................................................................................A-5
3.2 HV Generator (in compliance with IEC 60601-2-7) .........................................................A-6
3.3 Modes of Operation ........................................................................................................A-8
3.4 X-ray Source, Filtration, and Collimation .........................................................................A-9
4.0 Accessories ..........................................................................................................................A-11
4.1 Compression Paddles ....................................................................................................A-11
4.2 Apertures .......................................................................................................................A-12
4.3 Magnification ................................................................................................................A-12
4.4 Image Receptors ............................................................................................................A-12
Appendix B: Technical References ..................................................................... B-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... B-1
2.0 Test Points ............................................................................................................................. B-1
3.0 LED Indicators ....................................................................................................................... B-7
4.0 Image Receptor Detect Board—Sensor Combinations ............................................................ B-9
5.0 Fuses .................................................................................................................................... B-10
6.0 Jumpers ................................................................................................................................ B-12
Index ................................................................................................................... 1-i
iv P/N 9-500-0255
Service Manual
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 The Affinity System .......................................................................................................1-1

Figure 1-2 Affinity Gantry and C-arm.............................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-3 The Control Panel.........................................................................................................1-8
Figure 1-4 Label Locations...........................................................................................................1-11
Figure 2-1 Example Room Layout ..................................................................................................2-1
Figure 2-2 Uncrating the Gantry ....................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-3 Isolation Transformer Taps............................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-4 Gantry Components—Covers and Panels......................................................................2-6
Figure 2-5 User Lamp (X-ray ON/Power ON) Connections ............................................................2-7
Figure 2-6 Remote Control Panel Installation ................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-7 Rear Connector Panel (Shroud removed) and Lower Rear Panel Connections ...............2-9
Figure 2-8 Connecting a Footswitch ............................................................................................2-11
Figure 2-9 Installing the Operator Radiation Shield......................................................................2-14
Figure 3-1 Affinity Controls and Indicators.....................................................................................3-1
Figure 3-2 Location of the Emergency Off Switches and the Circuit Breaker ..................................3-3
Figure 3-3 The 7-Button Keypad on the C-arm...............................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 The 3-Button Keypad on the Tubehead.........................................................................3-6
Figure 3-5 The Affinity Series Control Panel...................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-6 The Run Mode Screen ..................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-7 The User Defaults Screen..............................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-8 The Exposure Default Screen ......................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-9 The Calibration Mode/Debug Screen ..........................................................................3-11
Figure 3-10 Calibration Screen #1—Calibration Mode ................................................................3-11
Figure 4-1 Calibration Screen #1 ...................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-5 Compression Force Calibration Setup ...........................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Compression Thickness Calibration Setup.....................................................................4-8
Figure 4-7 High Voltage Generator Calibration Setup ..................................................................4-10
Figure 4-8 HV Control Filament Board ........................................................................................4-11
Figure 4-9 Example—Filament Waveforms Pattern ......................................................................4-13
Figure 4-10 Example—Backup Timer Time-out Signal .................................................................4-17
Figure 4-11 Half-Value Layer Setup .............................................................................................4-37
Figure 4-12 Reproducibility and Linearity Test Setup ...................................................................4-39
Figure 4-13 Reproducibility Worksheet .......................................................................................4-42
Figure 4-14 Linearity Worksheet..................................................................................................4-43
Figure 4-15 IRSD Shielding Test ..................................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-16 Tubehead Shielding Test...........................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-17 X-ray Beam Alignment Template ..............................................................................4-48
Figure 4-18 Aperture Alignment ..................................................................................................4-50
Figure 4-19 Affinity Apertures......................................................................................................4-51
Figure 4-20 Auto-Aperture Alignment—18 x 24 cm Large Focal Spot ..........................................4-53
Figure 4-21 Light Field Size Adjustment.......................................................................................4-56
P/N 9-500-0255 v
Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 4-22 Light Field Edge Contrast Test................................................................................... 4-58

Figure 4-23 Probe Locations—Light Field Illuminance ................................................................ 4-59
Figure 4-24 Adjustment—Light Field Illuminance ....................................................................... 4-60
Figure 4-25 Adjustment - Compression Motor Chain................................................................... 4-61
Figure 4-26 Compression Thickness Potentiometer ..................................................................... 4-62
Figure 4-27 kV Offset Calibration—Calibration Screen #3........................................................... 4-64
Figure 5-1 Connecting Laptop Computer to Affinity .................................................................... 5-12
Figure 6-1 Gantry Components ..................................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6-2 Gantry Components—Covers and Panels ..................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-3 Rear Connector and Lower Rear Panels—Removal....................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-4 C-arm Angle Display Board—Removal......................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-5 Emergency Off Switch—Removal................................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-6 Control Panel Components .......................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-7 HV Generator Assembly (old style mounting plate)—Removal ................................... 6-13
Figure 6-8 HV Generator Assembly (new style mounting plate)—Removal.................................. 6-16
Figure 6-9 Microprocessor Firmware Chip—Replacement........................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-10 Main Circuit Breaker—Removal ............................................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-11 C-arm Detent Microswitch—Removal ...................................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-12 C-arm Rotation Potentiometer—Removal ................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-13 Shipping Collar Installation of VTA Rail ................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6-14 Components of the Vertical Drive Assembly............................................................. 6-26
Figure 6-15 C-arm Frame Components........................................................................................ 6-28
Figure 6-16 Tubehead/Beam Limiting Components ..................................................................... 6-29
Figure 6-17 Compression Device Components ........................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-18 IRSD Components .................................................................................................... 6-31
Figure 6-19 Patient Face Shield ................................................................................................... 6-32
Figure 6-20 C-arm Frame Covers................................................................................................. 6-34
Figure 6-21 Filament Protection Board—Removal....................................................................... 6-35
Figure 6-22 C-arm Switch Pads—Removal .................................................................................. 6-36
Figure 6-23 C-Arm Accessory Detect Board—Removal ............................................................... 6-38
Figure 6-24 Tubehead Covers—Removal .................................................................................... 6-39
Figure 6-25 X-ray Tube—Removal .............................................................................................. 6-41
Figure 6-26 Tubehead Control Board—Removal ......................................................................... 6-43
Figure 6-27 C-Arm Cooling Fan—Removal ................................................................................. 6-45
Figure 6-28 Aperture Detect Board—Removal ............................................................................ 6-46
Figure 6-29 Filter Shifter Assembly—Removal............................................................................. 6-47
Figure 6-30 Light Field Lamp Assembly with Fan—Removal ....................................................... 6-48
Figure 6-31 Motorized Mirror Assembly—Removal..................................................................... 6-50
Figure 6-32 Compression Motor and Brake Assembly—Removal ................................................ 6-52
Figure 6-33 Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly—Removal .................................... 6-54
Figure 6-34 Removing the Force Load Cell ................................................................................. 6-54
Figure 6-35 Compression / AEC Position Display Boards—Removal............................................ 6-56
Figure 6-36 Removal of Timing Belt from Upper Block Assembly ............................................... 6-57
Figure 6-37 Removal of Timing Belt from Bearing Block Assembly ............................................. 6-58
Figure 6-38 Compression Thickness Potentiometer—Removal .................................................... 6-59
Figure 6-39 IRSD Covers—Removal............................................................................................ 6-60
Figure 6-40 AEC Sensor Assembly—Removal.............................................................................. 6-61
Figure 6-41 Position Detect and Accessory Detect Boards—Removal ......................................... 6-62
Figure 6-42 AEC Position Comp. Display Microprocessor—Removal .......................................... 6-63
Figure 6-43 Microprocessor Firmware Chip—Replacement......................................................... 6-64
Figure A-1 System Dimensions......................................................................................................A-2
Figure B-1 Fuse Location—Gantry ............................................................................................. B-11
vi P/N 9-500-0255
Service Manual
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table P-1 List of Acronyms for Affinity ........................................................................................ P-xi

Table 1-1 Required Tools and Equipment for Installation and Maintenance .................................1-2
Table 1-2 Certifiable Components .............................................................................................1-10
Table 3-1 Post Startup Tests—C-arm Controls ..............................................................................3-5
Table 3-2 Post Startup Tests—Tubehead and Footswitches ..........................................................3-6
Table 3-3 Setting User Defaults .................................................................................................3-14
Table 4-1 Microprocessor S2 DIP Switches ..................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 The Calibration Screens ...............................................................................................4-3
Table 4-3 Filament Waveforms Amplitude .................................................................................4-15
Table 4-4 Reduced mA Filament Waveform Amplitude .............................................................4-16
Table 4-5 Typical Clinical Values for Breast Composition and Thickness ...................................4-19
Table 4-6 AEC Performance Worksheet—Large Focal Spot, Mo Filter ........................................4-24
Table 4-7 AEC Performance Worksheet—Large Focal Spot, Rh Filter .........................................4-25
Table 4-8 AEC Performance Worksheet—Small Focal Spot, Mo Filter ........................................4-29
Table 4-9 AEC Performance Worksheet—Small Focal Spot, Rh Filter .........................................4-30
Table 4-10 HTC Factor Worksheet ............................................................................................4-31
Table 4-11 Large Bucky Factor Worksheet .................................................................................4-32
Table 4-12 Compression Thickness Threshold Semi-Log ............................................................4-34
Table 4-13 Half-Value Layer Semi-Log ......................................................................................4-38
Table 5-1 Affinity Recommended Preventive Maintenance Procedures ........................................5-2
Table 5-2 Affinity Series Alert Messages .....................................................................................5-10
Table 5-3 Null-Modem, 9-pin to 25-pin Adapter Connections ...................................................5-12
Table 6-1 Tubehead Control Board Push Button Switches. ........................................................6-44
Table 7-1 Gantry Cover, Control Panel and Internal Components—Parts List ..............................7-1
Table 7-2 Gantry Left and Right-Side Components—Parts List .....................................................7-2
Table 7-3 C-Arm Frame Components—Parts List .........................................................................7-2
Table 7-4 C-Arm Tubehead Components—Parts List ...................................................................7-2
Table 7-5 C-Arm Compression Device Components—Parts List ...................................................7-3
Table 7-6 C-Arm Image Receptor Support Device—Parts List ......................................................7-3
Table 7-7 Accessories for the Affinity—Parts List .........................................................................7-3
Table A-1 AEC Mode Operating Ranges ..................................................................................... A-5
Table A-2 kV Versus mA Table ................................................................................................... A-7
Table B-1 Filament Protect Board (PN 1-003-0289) Test Points .................................................. B-1
Table B-2 Power Control Board (PN 1-003-0445) Test Points ..................................................... B-2
Table B-3 C-arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) Test Points ........................................................ B-2
Table B-4 Display Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0428) Test Points ....................................... B-3
Table B-5 Tubehead Control Board (PN 1-003-0403) Test Points ................................................ B-3
Table B-6 AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor (PN 1-003-0471) Test Points ....... B-3
Table B-7 AEC Position Compression Display (PN 1-003-0472) Test Points ................................ B-4
Table B-8 Auxiliary Power Distribution Board (PN 1-003-0489) Test Points ............................... B-4
Table B-9 Communications Interface Board (PN 1-003-0434) Test Points ................................... B-4
Table B-10 Host Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493) ........................................................... B-5
Table B-11 HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) Test Points ......................................... B-6
Table B-12 Tubehead Control Board (1-003-0403) LED Indicators ............................................. B-7
Table B-13 Display Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0428) LED Indicators ............................... B-7
Table B-14 C-arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) LED Indicators ................................................ B-7
Table B-15 Relay Protection Board (PN 1-003-0490) LED Indicators .......................................... B-7
P/N 9-500-0255 vii

Service Manual
List of Tables
Table B-16 Host Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493) LED Indicators .................................... B-8
Table B-17 Host Microprocessor Board—C-arm Switch Multiple Function Indicators ................. B-8
Table B-18 HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) LED Indicators .................................... B-8
Table B-19 Image Receptor Sensor Combinations ....................................................................... B-9
Table B-20 Affinity Series Fuses ................................................................................................ B-10
Table B-21 Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493) Jumper Settings ......................................... B-12
Table B-22 Communications Interface Board (PN 1-003-0434) Jumper Settings ........................ B-12
Table B-23 C-Arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) Jumper Settings ............................................. B-12
Table B-24 HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) Jumper Settings ................................. B-13
viii P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Preface
Using the Service Manual
Preface
1.0 Using the Service Manual

The manuals available for use with this system are:
• Affinity Service Manual—PN 9-500-0255 (this manual)
• Affinity Operator’s Manual—PN 9-500-0246
• Affinity Schematics Package—PN 9-500-0269
• AutoFilm I.D. User’s Guide—PN 9-500-0078
• Rapid ID User’s Guide—PN 9-500-0300
The first four chapters of this service manual provide a service engineer with a sequence for
setting up and calibrating the systems (Affinity and Affinity Platinum). The remaining sections
describe the maintenance procedures (for example, performance tests, adjustments, and
removal and replacement), replacement parts and specifications.
Chapter 1: General Information: This chapter describes the general system, X-ray, electrical,
and mechanical safety precautions, and compliance information.
Chapter 2: System Installation: This chapter describes unpacking, positioning, and

installing the system. It also describes attaching the interconnections, mounting the
accessories, and connecting the system to power.
Chapter 3: Functional Tests/Setting Defaults: This chapter describes performance and

functional tests, setting system defaults, and user preferences.
Chapter 4: Calibrations and Performance Tests: This chapter describes system calibration,
adjustment, and performance and compliance test procedures.
Chapter 5: Maintenance—General: This chapter describes general information in

maintaining the system.
Chapter 6: Maintenance—Remove and Replace Procedures: This chapter describes the

remove and replace procedures for the individual components that comprise the system.
Chapter 7: Parts List: This chapter provides tabular listings of the replacement parts.
Appendix A—Specifications: This appendix describes system specifications, including

performance specifications, X-ray tube and exposure specifications, compression
specifications, and beam limiting specifications.
Appendix B: Technical References: This appendix identifies test points, LED indications,
fuses, jumpers, and accessory identification sensor combinations in the Affinity Series
System.
P/N 9-500-0255 ix
Service Manual
Preface
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
2.0 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Definitions of Warnings, Cautions, and Notes used throughout this manual are as follows:
WARNING! This warning alerts you to procedures that you must follow
precisely to avoid causing potentially serious or fatal injury to
yourself or others.
Warning: This warning alerts you to procedures that you must follow
precisely to avoid injury to yourself or others.
Caution: Cautions point out procedures that you must follow precisely to avoid
damage to equipment, loss of data, or corruption of files in software
applications.
Note… Notes indicate important information that must be followed to ensure the
proper operation of the system.
3.0 International Symbols

This section explains the International Symbols used on this system.
Potential Equalization Connection for a conductor other than the Protective

terminal Earth for a direct connection between two or more pieces
of electrical equipment.
Protective Earth terminal Used for the connection of the ground of the line cord or
ground cable of the equipment and no other purpose.
Off Power disconnection from the mains
On Power connection to the mains
WEEE Symbol indicating separate collection for electrical and

electronic equipment
Dangerous Voltage Identifies area of potentially lethal voltage
x P/N 9-500-0255
Service Manual
Preface
Acronym and Abbreviation List
4.0 Acronym and Abbreviation List

Table P-1 provides a list of the common acronyms and abbreviations used throughout the
Affinity Series Service Manual.
Table P-1: List of Acronyms for Affinity
Acronym Definition
21 CFR FDA Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21
A Amps
ACR MAP American College of Radiology Mammography Accreditation Program
ACR/CDC American College of Radiology/Center for Disease Control
AEC Automatic Exposure Control
BR-12 Breast Equivalent Material
CF Compression Force
cm centimeter
DMM Digital Multimeter
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EMO Switch Emergency OFF Switch
ESD Electro-static Discharge
F.A.S.T. Fully Automatic Self-Adjusting Tilt Paddle
HV High Voltage
HTC High Transmission Cellular Grid
HVL Beam Quality Half-Value Layer
I/O Input/Output
IR Image Receptor
IRSD Image Receptor Support Device
lb Pound(s)
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
mA milli-Amps
Mag Magnification Mode
max maximum
mGy milli-Gray
min minimum
mm millimeters
Mo Molybdenum
MQSA Mammography Quality Standards Act
mrad milli-Radiation Absorbed Dose
N Newtons
OD Optical Density
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PMMA Polymethyl Methacrylate
PN Part Number
PWM Pulse-Width-Modulated
Rh or Rho Rhodium
SID Source to Image Distance
V Volts
VAC Volts, Alternating Current
VDC Volts, Direct Current
VTA Vertical Travel Assembly
P/N 9-500-0255 xi
Service Manual
Preface
Acronym and Abbreviation List
xii P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Chapter 1: General Information
Introduction
1.0 Introduction
The Affinity is a dedicated mammography system that features automatic and manual exposure
modes, a compact Control Panel, and optional film labeling capabilities.
1.1 Intended Uses

The Affinity is intended to produce radiographic images of the breast. Its specific intended
use is for screening and diagnostic mammography.
Figure 1-1: The Affinity System
P/N 9-500-0255 1-1

Service Manual
Introduction
1.2 Required Tools and Equipment

Table 1-1 identifies the required tools and equipment for use during installation and
maintenance of the Affinity System.
Table 1-1: Required Tools and Equipment for Installation and Maintenance
• Standard Tool Set
• Scale/Force Gauge—1 - 50 lb (min)
• Tool, Field Service Belt Adjustment (PN 9-061-0107)
• Digital Multimeter (DMM)
• Oscilloscope—100 MHz (min) 2 channel
• High-Voltage Adapter Cable (PN 2-425-3015)
• High-Voltage Divider—Ratio of 10,000:1 or 100,000:1 with output impedance of 1 kW
• mAs Meter—dual range
• Densitometer
• Light Meter—UDT Instruments - Model 351
• Radiation Meter with probe (Victoreen Model 600 or equivalent)
• ACR Mammographic Phantom (ACR MAP) (Nuclear Associates #156 or equivalent)
• Aluminum Aperture for Light meter with 1.0 mm aperture
• Aluminum Filter Pack—Type 1100 (99.9% pure)
• Image Receptor Phantom Tool—Cassette Simulator (PN 9-060-0403)
• Lead Shield/Blocker—Approximately 4.0 x 4.0 cm
• Light Field Alignment Bars (PN 9-060-0173)
• Light/X-ray Field Template (PN 3-405-8010)
• Loctite, 242 Blue (PN 2-580-0506)
• PMMA Acrylic (or BR-12) - 0.5 cm thick (1 ea)
• Resolution Line Pair Phantom
1-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Safety
2.0 Safety
This section describes electrical, mechanical, and radiation safety, as well as precautions
concerning static electricity and magnetic media storage. The equipment complies with IEC
60601 (General, Collateral and applicable Particular Standards), UL 2601 and CSA
22.2601.1.
Warning: Hazardous Material Warning!
• The X-ray tube contains a beryllium window that should not be

touched.
• Follow all local ordinances or regulations for disposal of the X-ray tube.
• The X-ray tube covers and the image receptor contain lead that should
not be touched.
• Follow all local ordinances or regulations for disposal of these covers.
Note… The Affinity does not contain any mercury or latex in its construction.
2.1 Electrical Safety

The equipment is designed to comply with IEC 60601-1, UL 2601, and CSA 22.2601.1.
The Affinity is classified as CLASS I, TYPE B permanently connected equipment as per IEC
60601-1. There are no special provisions to protect the system from flammable anesthetics
or ingress of liquids. However, the footswitches are splash-proof as per IPX6 or better.
Emergency Off Switches are provided in compliance with IEC 60601-2-32. Each of these
switches disables power to the entire system.
WARNING! LETHAL voltages are present within the system. Use extreme
caution to avoid contacting, directly or indirectly (through
tools), any connector pins, terminals, or test points. Remove
all jewelry before working on the system, and avoid wearing
loose fitting clothing.
Warning: Electrical equipment used in the presence of flammable anesthetics

or oxygen may cause an explosion.
Warning: Only qualified electronic technicians who are certified and

experienced in the maintenance and repair of high voltage X-ray
equipment should attempt to service this equipment.
Warning: Never perform service alone. Only service this equipment in the
company of someone who is capable of rendering aid should an
accident occur.
P/N 9-500-0255 1-3

Service Manual
Safety
2.2 Mechanical Safety

The equipment is designed to comply with the requirements of IEC 60601-1, UL 2601, and
IEC 60601-2-32, in that the following conditions exist:
• The C-arm rotation brake remains locked upon loss of electrical power (fail safe).
• Automatic compression release (decompression) is disabled when a localization paddle
is installed.
• C-arm Force Limit is reached. The downward motorized movement of the C-arm is
limited to a force of 154 N, +44 N (35 lb, +10 lb).
2.3 Radiation Safety

The system’s radiation safety complies with all requirements of 21CFR Part 1020, IEC 60601-
2-7, and IEC 60601-1-3. The shield is rated for a 0.5 mm Pb (lead) equivalence. To ensure
radiological protection, restrict access to the system in accordance with local regulations.
The exposure duration is limited by the following normal conditions:
• The manual mAs timer
• The Automatic Exposure Control circuits
The exposure duration is also limited by the following abnormal conditions:
• Premature release of the X-ray Button
• Exceeding the preset “back-up time”
• The independent safety hardware back-up timer
• Detection of a generator fault
2.4 Isolation Integrity
WARNING! To ensure the isolation for the system, attach only Hologic
accessories or options to the system.
WARNING! To ensure proper isolation, maintain a 1.5 meter distance

between the patient and any non-patient devices. Non-patient
system components must not be installed in the Patient Area.
1.5m
1-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Safety
2.5 Interlocks
In addition to the Emergency Off Switches, the Affinity Series has several safety interlocks,
including:
• C-arm Movement Interlock - This interlock immediately stops vertical travel and
disables all C-arm vertical movements (except C-arm UP) if the C-arm encounters an
obstruction during travel (until the obstruction is cleared). C-arm movement is also
inhibited when compression force exceeds 50 N (12 lb).
• Automatic Compression Release Interlock - This interlock disables the compression
release function, including automatic compression release (if enabled) when a
Localization Paddle is installed.
• Early Release Interlock - This interlock immediately terminates the exposure if the X-ray
Button is released prior to the end of the exposure.
• Cassette Sense Interlock - This interlock prevents X-ray exposure if the system does not
detect a cassette in the Bucky, or if the cassette is not ejected after an exposure.
• Aperture Interlock - This function detects the installed aperture and image receptor and
prevents X-ray exposure if the combination is not compatible.
• Mirror/Filter Interlock - This interlock prevents X-ray exposure when the Light Field
Mirror and/or the Filter is not positioned correctly.
2.6 External Indicators

The Affinity contains Relay Indicators that allow for connections to external indicators when
the system is on and when X-rays are being taken.
P/N 9-500-0255 1-5

Service Manual
System Description
3.0 System Description

The three major hardware components of the Affinity Series are:
• The Gantry
• The C-arm
• The Control Panel
The following paragraphs briefly describe each of the major hardware components.
3.1 Gantry and C-Arm

See Figure 1-2, page 1-7 throughout the following. The Gantry houses the electronics that
produce the high voltage needed for mammography. The mechanical assemblies that
position the C-arm (height and rotation), the input transformer, the Emergency Off Switches
and most of the system electronics are also in the Gantry. LED readouts on the left and right
side of the Gantry show the C-arm rotation angle.
The Gantry also supports an externally mounted Operator Radiation Shield that protects the
operator from exposure during the exam, and houses the input power connector panel and
Footswitch receptacles.
The C-arm is comprised of the following major assemblies:
• X-ray Tubehead
• Compression Device
• Image Receptor Support Device
A pivot mechanism connects the C-arm to the Gantry. Pushbuttons on each side of the C-
arm, and on the tubehead, control C-arm movement, Compression Release, Compression
Up/Down, and the Light Field Lamp. The design of the C-arm permits examination of
standing, sitting, or recumbent patients.
1-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Description
Figure 1-2: Affinity Gantry and C-arm
Legend for Figure 1-2

1. C-arm Rotation Angle Display 9. Image Receptor Support Device
2. Emergency Off Switch (3) 10. Compression Paddle
3. Control Panel 11. Compression Device
4. Patient Handle 12. Face Shield
5. Operator Radiation Shield 13. Aperture Slot
6. X-ray Footswitch (not visible) 14. X-ray Tubehead
7. Footswitch 15. 3-button Keypad
8. 7-button Keypad
P/N 9-500-0255 1-7

Service Manual
System Description
3.2 Control Panel

The Control Panel is a compact user interface that mounts to the side of the Gantry, or at a
remote location. The Control Panel is an interactive device consisting of a Function Keypad
and an LCD Display Window. It is used to set exposure techniques and parameters, provide
operator instructions, display alert and system status messages, and initiate X-rays.

1. Exposure Factor Selection Area
2. Exposure Parameters Area
3. Exposure Parameter Selection Area
4. Message Area
5. Status Area
6. Compression Release Key
7. Exposure Indicator
8. Exposure Enable Key
9. Change Keys
10. Reset Key
11. Function Keypad
12. Scroll Keys
13. LCD Display Window
Figure 1-3: The Control Panel
1-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Compliance Data
4.0 Compliance Data

The Mammography System conforms to all applicable FDA regulations. Labels addressing
the certifiable components are fixed to the system at several points (Figure 1-4, page 1-11).
The main identification label containing the equipment model number and serial number is
near the input power receptacle on the Gantry.
The serial number is used to track systems for warranty and service purposes, and will be
requested should it become necessary to contact Hologic regarding the system.
Note… The Hologic Bucky devices (18 x 24 cm and 24 x 30 cm) are certified
components that do not have to be reported on form FDA 2579 (Ref BRH:
Doc MA3499).
4.1 Compliance Statement

The manufacturer states that this device conforms to:
• Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC Annex II.
• CAN/CSA ISO 13485:2003/ISO 13485:2003
• IEC 60601-1: Safety Requirements For Medical Electrical Systems
• IEC 60601-1-2: Electromagnetic Compatibility
• IEC 60601-1-3: General Requirements for Radiation Protection
• IEC 60601-1-4: Safety of Programmable Electrical Medical Systems
• IEC 60601-2-7: Safety Of High Voltage Generators
• IEC 60601-2-28: Safety of X-ray Source Assemblies
• IEC 60601-2-32: Safety of Associated Equipment
• IEC 60601-2-45:2001: Safety of Mammographic Equipment
• FDA, 21 CFR [Parts 820, 900 and 1020]
• UL 2601-1: General Requirements for Safety
• CSA 22.2. No. 601.1: General Requirements for Safety
4.1.1 Remote Indication of the Ready State

If you prefer to indicate the “Ready State” at a location other than at the operator
panel, such as at the room door, a signal is available on the Host Microprocessor
Board (PN 1-003-0493), connector AJ31 between pins 5 (+5 V, active high) and 9
(ground). This signal is a low level logic signal that drives the relay to provide remote
activation of an indicator lamp (LED).
Caution: Do not use an external power supply to drive the output.
P/N 9-500-0255 1-9

Service Manual
Compliance Data
4.2 Certifiable Components

These components are identified by their individual serial numbers in addition to the serial
number of the overall Hologic system.
Table 1-2: Certifiable Components
Item Manufacturer
X-ray Tube Varian (IM-113R)
Beam Limiting Device Hologic
High-Voltage Generator Hologic
X-Ray Control Hologic
Image Receptor Support Device Hologic
Bucky 18 x 24 cm Hologic
Bucky 24 x 30 cm Hologic
1-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Compliance Data
4.3 Location of Labels

Labels and nameplates are positioned appropriately on the Affinity Series mammography
system. Nameplates contain the system’s serial number and manufacturing date. When
calling in for support, please reference the system serial number noted on Label 1.
Figure 1-4: Label Locations
P/N 9-500-0255 1-11

Service Manual
Compliance Data
1-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Chapter 2: System Installation
Room Planning
1.0 Room Planning

The exam room layout should be pre-planned before the arrival of the Affinity. Measure the
height and width of the exam room door to ensure that it can accommodate the
mammography system (70" high, 30" wide minimum).
Figure 2-1: Example Room Layout
Other factors to consider when planning the room layout are:

• C-arm clearances: The C-arm requires 55" (minimum) to accommodate rotation, and
89” (minimum) to accommodate raising the C-arm to its upper limit. When planning the
room layout, consider extra wall and ceiling clearance for movement and handling of C-
arm controls.
• Operator Radiation Shield clearances: The protective Operator Radiation Shield extends
24” from the side of the system. The room layout must provide enough space to allow
the user to maneuver around the Operator Radiation Shield when it is attached.
• Movement clearance: Always consider space allocation for patient and technologist
movement. Avoid obstructions in the room that may hinder access to the system controls
or the patient.
• Storage: Provide convenient storage for patient records, film cassettes, and system
accessories. If accessory storage is not possible within the exam room, make
arrangements for safe storage close by.
• Recommended Power Source Requirements: Refer to Appendix A, Section 1.1.
P/N 9-500-0255 2-1

Service Manual
Unpacking Instructions
2.0 Unpacking Instructions

This section describes receiving and unpacking instructions, and inspections required prior
to installing this system.
2.1 Receiving Instructions

This system is shipped in separate boxes that contain the:
• Gantry
• Accessories
• Operator Radiation Shield
Upon receipt, perform the following before opening the containers:
1. Inspect each container for damage.
2. Note any damage on the shipping manifest.
3. Notify Hologic of any external shipping damage.
2.2 Uncrating the System

The Affinity Gantry is crated and shipped in a prone position.
Be sure to have the necessary machinery and personnel available to move heavy medical
equipment safely.
Figure 2-2: Uncrating the Gantry
2-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Unpacking Instructions
Uncrate the system as follows:

1. Cut the retaining straps that secure the container top to the shock-mounted wooden
pallet. Lift the container top off the system.
2. Carefully remove all shipping materials (foam padding, tie-downs, straps, shipping wrap,
etc.) from the system and pallet. Lift any accessory boxes from the pallet.
3. Open all crates and boxes and verify their contents against the packing list and sales
order.
Note… If there is a discrepancy between the contents and the packing list or sales
order, contact Hologic immediately. If it is necessary to re-pack any items
for future installation, use the original packaging materials.
4. Inspect all items for damage, then safely store them near the exam site.
Caution: To prevent damage, do not store the Operator Radiation Shield flat. Avoid
damaging the Operator Radiation Shield by impact or scratching.
Note… If shipping damage is of a concealed nature, contact the carrier as soon as

such damage is found, and request an inspection for shipping damage.
Normally, any claims for shipping damage must be completed within 15
days of receiving the shipment.
Warning: Never pull on the C-arm as the system is top heavy. To prevent
injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment, take care when
uncrating the system.
5. While still in the loading area, carefully move the pallet into an upright position.
6. Remove the top collar securing the system to the pallet.
7. Using the installed dolly, carefully roll the system off the pallet.
8. Transport the system, on the installed dolly, from the loading area to the exam area for
installation.
9. Remove the 4 bolts securing the system to the dolly.
10. Carefully maneuver the system off the back end of the dolly, slide the dolly out and
position the system in the area of installation.
11. Return the dolly to Hologic according to the shipping instructions posted on the dolly.
P/N 9-500-0255 2-3

Service Manual
System Installation
3.0 System Installation

The following sections describes setting up, positioning, and installing this system in the
exam room.
As appropriate, install this system in the exam room as described in the following general
sequence of steps:
Note… Thoroughly read all procedures prior to starting.

1. Position the Gantry in the area of the exam room where the system is to be permanently
installed. Ensure the Gantry is positioned for easy access to the rear of the system.
2. Perform the following installation procedures in the order given.
• Input Power Configuration—Section 3.1
• Power Cable Connection—Section 3.2, page 2-5
• Remote X-ray ON/Power ON Light Connection—Section 3.3, page 2-6
• Control Panel Installation—Section 3.4, page 2-8
• Securing System in Position—Section 3.5, page 2-10
• Installing the System Accessories—Section 3.6, page 2-10
• Initial Start Up Procedures—Section 3.7, page 2-13
• Final Operational Setup—Section 3.8, page 2-14
Note… Do not install any covers or panels until instructed to do so.
3.1 Input Power Configuration

The isolation transformer must be configured to match the power source at the site. This
portion of the manual describes the steps to properly configure and connect the
mammography system to a voltage source.
Before connecting the system to a power outlet, verify the source voltage as follows:
1. Measure the voltage at the outlet receptacle.
2. Inquire as to any history of voltage fluctuations or voltage-related problems that have
occurred in other equipment at the site.
3. Calculate the ground impedance using the following formula:
VNL – V FL
R = ------------------------
-
I MAX • L
Where:
R = Ground Impedance
VNL = Voltage at no load
VFL = Voltage at full load (32 kV, 100 mA)
IMAX.L = Current at full load
Ground Impedance must be no more than:
0.20 Ω at 208, 220, 230, 240 V~ TAP

0.16 Ω at 200 V~ TAP
2-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Installation
After determining the input voltage range, verify the system’s isolation transformer is
correctly set (reconfigure as required).
The following describes how to access the input power assembly chassis and reconfigure the
isolation transformer taps to match the previously measured source voltage.
1. Turn off the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the Gantry (down position).
2. Remove the Gantry Upper Rear panel as described in Chapter 6, Section 2.1.2, Upper
Rear Gantry Panel, p. 6-4. Set the cover aside.
3. Remove the Rear Connector panel and shroud as described in Chapter 6, Section 2.1.3,
Rear Connector Panel, p. 6-5. Pull the panel slightly away from the system, then let it
hang by the attached wiring harness.
4. To gain access to the input power assembly chassis, remove the Lower Rear panel as
described in Chapter 6, Section 2.1.4, Lower Rear Panel/Power Distribution Assembly, p.
6-6, Steps 1 through 3. The isolation transformer is mounted on the lower shelf of the
input power assembly chassis.
5. Configure the input wiring to tap the transformer so that it matches the previously
measured source voltage.
Figure 2-3: Isolation Transformer Taps
3.2 Power Cable Connection

The power cord must be hardwired into the power source by a certified electrician.
P/N 9-500-0255 2-5

Service Manual
System Installation
3.3 Remote X-ray On/Power On Light Connection

The Affinity System can operate remote lights that indicate when the System is on and
when X-rays are being taken. These lights are normally installed above the door to the
exam room. Installation should be done by a certified electrician. The relay contacts
provided are rated as follows:
• 10 Amp 250 VAC (normally open)
• 10 Amp 30 VDC (normally open)
STOP
Figure 2-4: Gantry Components—Covers and Panels
Connections are made inside the removable power supply distribution assembly,
(Figure 2-4 #1), located on the input power assembly chassis:
2-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Installation
1. Locate the removable power distribution assembly. For removal instructions, refer to
Chapter 6, Section 2.1.3, Rear Connector Panel, p. 6-5.
2. Connect the remote X-ray on and Power on cables to the terminal board as shown
below.
Figure 2-5: User Lamp (X-ray ON/Power ON) Connections
Legend for Figure 2-5, p. 2-7

1. X-ray ON Lamp Connections
2. Power ON Lamp Connections
3. Complete the remote cables and light installation following local guidelines.
4. Reinstall the Gantry lower rear, upper rear, and rear connector panels. Do not reinstall
the rear connector panel shroud at this time.
3.3.1 Remote X-ray ON Light Configuration

When installed, the remote X-ray ON light can be configured to define whether it is
on only during the X-ray period or throughout the entire boost and X-ray periods.
Configure it as follows:
1. Locate the Host Microprocessor board on the Gantry right side. See Figure 6-1,
p. 6-2 for board location and identification.
2. Install jumper on JP7:
• For light on only during the X-ray period, install a jumper between positions
1 and 2.
• For light on during the Boost and the X-ray period, install a jumper between
positions 2 and 3.
P/N 9-500-0255 2-7

Service Manual
System Installation
3.4 Control Panel Installation

The Control Panel is either mounted to the side of the Gantry or remotely located. Follow the
appropriate instructions for the site’s required configuration.
3.4.1 Control Panel to Gantry Installation

For Gantry mount configurations, the Affinity is shipped with the Control Panel
already attached to the right side cover.
Warning: For those systems with the Control Panel mounted to the Gantry,
the Operator Radiation Shield is required. Install the Operator
Radiation Shield after completing the initial startup procedures.
3.4.2 Control Panel Remote Location Installation

For systems that are configured for remote operations, the Remote Control Panel Kit
is included.
Figure 2-6: Remote Control Panel Installation
The kit consists of the following:

• Housing (2) and Housing Mount (1)
• Control Panel (3) and EMO Switch Harness (2 50 ft cables)
• EMO Switch - Emergency Stop Switch (5)
2-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Installation
Install the Remote Control Panel as follows:

1. Mount the Control Panel housing bracket (Figure 2-6, #1) to the wall (or other
mounting apparatus) in the remote location using the supplied hardware.
2. Route the Control Panel and EMO Switch harness through the strain relief
(Figure 2-6, #4), then through the access hole in the housing bracket. Make all
harness connections, then tighten the strain relief.
3. Mount the Control Panel housing (Figure 2-6, #2) to the housing bracket using
the supplied hardware. Note that an EMO Switch is mounted on the housing.
4. Align the tabs on the rear of the Control Panel (Figure 2-6, #3) with the slots on
the housing. Insert the tabs into the slots and slide the Control Panel down to
lock it in place.
5. Connect the end of the Control Panel interconnect cable to the Remote Control
receptacle (Figure 2-7, #8) on the rear connector panel.
6. Connect the Emergency Stop Switch interconnect cable to the Emergency Stop
receptacle (Figure 2-7, #9) on the rear connector panel.
Figure 2-7: Rear Connector Panel (Shroud removed) and Lower Rear Panel Connections

1. X-ray Footswitch Receptacle
2. Footswitch Receptacles
3. AutoID/Rapid ID Power Outlet Receptacle
4. Emergency Stop Receptacle
5. Remote Control (remotely located Control Panel) Receptacle
6. Printer/AutoFilm I.D. Receptacle
7. Rapid I.D. Receptacle
P/N 9-500-0255 2-9

Service Manual
System Installation
3.5 Securing System in Position

1. Remove left and right Gantry side panels as described in Chapter 6, Section 2.1.1, Left
and Right Side Panels, p. 6-4.
2. Carefully move the system into its pre-designated final position. Ensure the Circuit
Breaker and rear panels are accessible.
3. Mount the system to the floor in accordance with site specification drawings and/or
local building codes.
Note… Do not reinstall left and right side panels at this time.
3.6 Installing the System Accessories

This section describes the installation of the following accessories:
• X-ray Footswitch
• Dual Function Footswitch(es)
• Film Labeling Devices
3.6.1 X-ray Footswitch

When the X-ray Footswitch is installed on a system, you must press both the X-ray
Footswitch and the X-ray Button on the Control Panel at the same time to initiate and
finish an exposure.
Install the X-ray Footswitch as follows:
Note… The X-ray Footswitch is delivered already mounted on the X-ray Footswitch
mounting bracket.
1. Secure the X-ray Footswitch mounting bracket to the Gantry base plate using
two screws (supplied) on the right side of the Gantry.
Note… When the Gantry right side cover is installed, the X-ray Footswitch is
positioned below the Control Panel).
2. Connect the X-ray Footswitch cable to the X-ray connector (Figure 2-7, #5).
a. Align the key in the footswitch connector to the keyhole in the receptacle.
b. Push the connector straight in until it stops.
3. Locate DIP switch (S2) at the lower right side of the Host Microprocessor board
(Gantry right-side panel removed). Enable the X-ray Footswitch by setting S2
switch 3 to OFF.
2-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Installation
3.6.2 Dual Function Footswitch

A Dual-Function Footswitch provides C-arm and Compression Up or Down
movement. Normal system configuration includes one footswitch with an optional
second footswitch. Two receptacles (on the lower rear of the Gantry) provide
connections for the footswitch(es). To connect the footswitch(es):
1. Attach the footswitch connector(s) to the left and/or right footswitch receptacles
(Figure 2-7, #6) on the Gantry connection panel.
a. Align the key in the footswitch connector to the keyhole in the receptacle.
Figure 2-8: Connecting a Footswitch
b. Push the connector straight in until it stops.
Note… Either footswitch can be connected to either footswitch receptacle.
2. Position the footswitch in the desired location on the floor below the C-arm.
WARNING: Position the footswitch(es) in such a way as to prevent accidental

activation by patients or operators.
P/N 9-500-0255 2-11

Service Manual
System Installation
3.6.3 Connecting Film Labeling Devices

The Affinity accepts the following film labeling devices:
• AutoFilm I.D.
• Rapid ID
• Label Printer
The AutoFilm I.D. and Rapid ID place photographic labels directly on the film. The
Label Printer prints self-adhesive labels that are manually placed on each film.
Note… The film labeling device (AutoFilm I.D. or Printer) must be installed so that it
is situated at least 1.5 meters (approximately 5 feet) from the patient.
AutoFilm I.D.
Refer to the AutoFilm I.D. User’s Guide for installation and operating procedures.
Rapid ID
Refer to the Rapid ID User’s Guide for installation and operating procedures.
Label Printer
The Label Printer prints a self-adhesive label of the exposure information. When
connected and on-line, the printer immediately prints a label after each exposure.
1. Insert the one end of the printer cable into the receptacle on the rear of the
Printer.
2. Connect the other end of the printer cable to the printer receptacle (Figure 2-7,
#2) on the rear of the Gantry.
3. Plug the printer power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of the printer,
then plug the opposite end into the printer power outlet (Figure 2-7, #4) on the
rear of the Gantry.
2-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Installation
3.7 Initial Startup Procedures

At this point in the installation, the system should be permanently mounted in position with
all power and applicable accessory connections made (except for the Operator Radiation
Shield). The rear panels should all be installed with the exception of the rear connector panel
shroud and the left and right cover panels.
3.7.1 Initial Startup

Prior to turning on the system for the first time, ensure the input panel has been
tapped to match the input power source.
1. Before turning on the system:
a. Verify that all three Emergency Off Switches are reset (four switches if
Control Panel is remotely installed) by turning them clockwise.
b. Be sure the room is clear of obstructions.
c. Correct all discrepancies before applying power.
d. Position the Operator Radiation Shield (if applicable) on the system. You
cannot, at this point, secure the shield in place as the right side cover is
removed.
2. Turn on the system as follows:
a. If a film labeling device is installed, apply power to the device (AutoFilm
I.D.). The AutoFilm I.D. has a “rocker” type power switch.
b. Turn on the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the Gantry (up position). The back
light of the display indicates that power is applied.
c. The Control Panel (refer to Chapter 3, Figure 3-1, #9) displays a message
indicating that internal tests are being performed.
d. Verify that the Control Panel displays the Run Mode screen after startup.
e. If the AutoFilm I.D. or Rapid ID is installed, verify that the Patient
Information Screen is displayed. Refer to the AutoFilm I.D. User’s Guide or
Rapid ID User’s Guide.
Note… If the system detects a fault condition during startup, an appropriate

message appears on the screen. The startup sequence is suspended until the
condition that caused the alert is remedied. Refer to the Alert Codes listed
in Chapter 5, Section 3.2, Alert Codes Log, p. 5-10, Table 5-2.
3. Perform the Post Startup Tests as described in Chapter 3, Section 2.3, Post-
Startup Tests, p. 3-3.
3.7.2 Setting Operational Parameters

Perform the following calibration and alignment procedures:
• Set User Defaults—Chapter 3, Section 4.0, Setting User Defaults, p. 3-14.
• Calibration Procedures—Chapter 4, Section 2.0, Calibration Procedures, p. 4-1.
• Performance Tests—Chapter 4, Section 6.0, Performance Tests, p. 4-36.
• X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment Procedures—Chapter 4, Section 7.0,
X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment Procedures, p. 4-48.
P/N 9-500-0255 2-13

Service Manual
System Installation
3.8 Final Operational Setup

After completing the calibration and alignment procedures, follow these steps to prepare the
system for operation.
1. Turn the system off.
2. Place the Operator Radiation Shield (if applicable) out of the way.
3. Install all covers and panels.
4. Install the Operator Radiation Shield (if applicable).
3.8.1 Installing the Operator Radiation Shield

The Operator Radiation Shield mounts to the side of the Gantry.
1. Install the Operator Radiation
Shield mounting bracket to the
top of the Operator Radiation
Shield using the hardware
provided. Do not tighten the
hardware at this time.
2. While aligning the pins on the
Operator Radiation Shield
mounting bracket with their
corresponding holes on the top of
the Gantry, position the bottom of
the Operator Radiation Shield in
the lower mounting bracket on
the right side of the Gantry.
3. Secure the radiation mounting
bracket to the top of the Gantry
with the hardware provided.
4. While gently pushing the
Operator Radiation Shield flush
with right side of Gantry, tighten
the hardware securing the
Operator Radiation Shield
mounting bracket to the top of the
Operator Radiation Shield.
5. Secure the Operator Radiation
Shield to the lower mounting
bracket with the hardware
provided.
Figure 2-9: Installing the Operator Radiation Shield
2-14 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Chapter 3: Functional Tests/Setting Defaults
Controls and Indicators
1.0 Controls and Indicators

The location of the Affinity Series Controls and Indicators, used throughout this chapter, is
shown below. For detailed information on the Affinity Controls and Indicators, refer to the
Affinity Series Operator’s Manual.
Figure 3-1: Affinity Controls and Indicators

1. C-arm Rotation Angle Display
2. Emergency Off Switches (EMO):
Two on front of Gantry, one on rear. (For those systems with the Remote Control Panel
installed, a fourth EMO Switch is located on the Control Panel mounting block.)
3. Control Panel
4. Circuit Breaker
5. X-ray Footswitch
6. Dual Function Footswitch
7. C-Arm Controls 7-Button Keypad (two top, two bottom)
8. Compression Device
9. Tubehead Controls 3-Button Keypad
P/N 9-500-0255 3-1

Service Manual
System Startup
2.0 System Startup

2.1 Pre-Startup Inspections
Perform these pre-startup Inspections before turning on the system:
1. Ensure that all three Emergency Off Switches are reset (four switches if Control Panel is
remotely installed) by turning them clockwise.
2. Verify the overall integrity of the mammography system by looking for open or loose
panels, missing hardware, and signs of damage.
3. Inspect the Operator Radiation Shield for chips, cracks, breaks, and secure attachment.
4. Be sure the room is clear of obstructions.
5. Correct all discrepancies before turning on the system.
2.2 Startup Sequence

Turn on the system as follows:
Notes… Always perform the pre-startup Inspections before turning on the system.
Always correct discrepancies before turning the system on and using it
clinically.
1. If a film labeling device is installed, turn it on.
2. Turn on the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the Gantry (up position). The back light of the
display indicates that power is applied.
3. The Control Panel displays a message indicating that internal tests are being performed.
4. Ensure that the Control Panel (Figure 3-1, #9) displays the Run Mode screen after startup.
5. If the AutoFilm I.D. or Rapid ID is installed, ensure that the Patient Information Screen is
displayed. Refer to the respective User’s Guide.
Note… If the system detects a fault condition during startup, an appropriate

message appears on the screen. The startup sequence is suspended until the
condition that caused the alert is corrected.
3-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Startup
2.3 Post-Startup Tests

After the system is turned on, to ensure mechanical integrity, verify the C-arm, Tubehead,
Emergency Off Switches, and Footswitch functions.
2.3.1 Emergency Off Switches
Figure 3-2: Location of the Emergency Off Switches and the Circuit Breaker
To test the Emergency Off switches:

1. Press any of the Emergency Off switches (Figure 3-2, # 1) and verify that the power is
immediately removed.
2. To reset the system, turn the Emergency Off Switch one-quarter turn to the right to reset it
(# 2), then turn the Circuit Breaker (# 5) off then back on.
3. Repeat this test for all remaining Emergency Off Switches on the system.
P/N 9-500-0255 3-3

Service Manual
System Startup
2.3.2 C-arm
(Upper left keypad shown)

1. Filter Type LED Indicators (if equipped)
2. Light Field Lamp
3. Compression Down Button
4. C-arm Down Button
5. C-arm Rotation Release Button
6. C-arm Up Button
7. Compression Up Button
8. Compression Release Button
Figure 3-3: The 7-Button Keypad on the C-arm
3-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
System Startup
Table 3-1: Post Startup Tests—C-arm Controls
Item # Button
Tests
(Figure 3-3) Description
1 Filter Indicator • Confirm that the Mo filter light is on. (The system always
(if equipped) comes up with Moly filter chosen.)
• Use the Control Panel to change the filter to Rh. Move the
highlight with the down arrow key until Filter is selected,
then press the right arrow key to change to the Rh Filter.
• Ensure that the Rh light is now on.
• Change the filter back to Moly.
2 Light Field Lamp • Press and release the Light Field Lamp Button.
• Verify the Light Field Lamp illuminates and then turns off
after approximately 30 sec.
3 Compression Down • Verify the Light Field Lamp illuminates, and the
Button compression device moves down while the button is held.
• Verify the compression thickness readout changes
accordingly.
• Ensure the compression device stops when the button is
released and the compression brake is active (handwheel-
up has resistance).
4 C-arm Down Button • Verify the C-arm moves down while the button is held and
it stops when the button is released.
5 C-arm Rotation • Verify the C-arm can be rotated while the button is held,
Release Button and the C-arm brake prevents rotation when the button is
released.
• Verify that when the C-arm rotates, the rotation readouts
on the Gantry change accordingly. Verify that the C-arm
rotation angle display shows zero degrees of rotation
when the C-arm is in the “CC” position.
6 C-arm Up Button • Verify the C-arm moves up while the button is held and it
stops when the button is released.
7 Compression Up • Verify the compression device moves up while the button

Button is held and the device stops when the button is released.
8 Compression • Press and release the Compression Release Button.

Release Button
• Verify the compression device moves up, stops
automatically and the compression brakes release
(handwheel turns easily in both directions).
P/N 9-500-0255 3-5

Service Manual
System Startup
2.3.3 Tubehead and Footswitches
1 2 3
Figure 3-4: The 3-Button Keypad on the Tubehead
Table 3-2: Post Startup Tests—Tubehead and Footswitches
Item # Button
Tests
(Figure 3-4) Description
1 C-arm Up Key • Verify the C-arm moves up while the button is held
and stops upon release.
2 C-arm Down Key • Verify the C-arm moves down while the button is
held and stops upon release.
3 C-arm Rotation • Verify the C-arm can be rotated while the button is
Release Key held and the brake prevents rotation when the
button is released.
Footswitch Controls • Push the C-arm up footswitch and verify the C-arm
moves up and stops when the footswitch is
released.
• Push the C-arm down footswitch and verify the C-
arm goes down and stops.
• Verify that the Compression Up and Down
footswitches function correctly.
3-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
The Affinity Series Control Panel
3.0 The Affinity Series Control Panel

The Affinity Series Control Panel sets exposure parameters and changes system settings. The
Control Panel is equipped with the following:
Figure 3-5: The Affinity Series Control Panel
# Name of Key Function

1 Display Screen Displays the current exposure techniques and system settings.
2 Function Keypad Contains the following controls/keys:
3 Scroll Keys Up/Down arrow keys move the on-screen highlight (cursor).
4 Change Keys Left/Right arrow keys select options on highlighted field.
5 Reset Key Acknowledges and clears an alert message. When used with
Change keys, it changes screens. When used with Scroll keys, it
adjusts the contrast of the Control Panel LCD display.
6 Compression Releases the compression brake and raises the compression
Release Key device.
7 Exposure Indicator Illuminates when the system is generating X-rays.
8 X-ray Key Initiates an exposure.
P/N 9-500-0255 3-7

Service Manual
3.1 Control Panel Screens

The Control Panel displays three user mode screens and four calibration screens. Pressing the
Reset + Right Arrow or Reset + Left Arrow keys moves to the next or previous screen.
The Run Mode Screen displays after startup. The user uses this screen to select exposure
techniques, receive messages regarding system status, make X-ray exposures, initiate
compression release, select the filter, and choose the compression release method.
Figure 3-6: The Run Mode Screen
3-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
The user uses the User Defaults Screen to set the defaults for:
• Compression Release
• Compression Force
• Cassette Sense
• Film ID
• Force Units
• Date
• Time
The choices made in the User Defaults Screen are displayed after startup.
Figure 3-7: The User Defaults Screen
P/N 9-500-0255 3-9

Service Manual
The user uses the Exposure Defaults Screen to set system defaults for exposure techniques.
The choices made in the Exposure Default Screen display in the Run Mode Exposure settings
after startup.
Figure 3-8: The Exposure Default Screen
Press Reset + Right Arrow at the same time to select the User Default Screen from the Run
Mode Screen.
To select the Exposure Default Screen from the Run Mode Screen, press Reset + Right Arrow
twice.
To go back to the Run Mode Screen from the Exposure Default Screen, press Reset + Left
Arrow twice; from the User Default Screen, press Reset + Left Arrow once.
Note… Access to the Calibration Mode (the Debug Screen and the four Calibration
Screens) requires the service engineer to configure a DIP switch on the Host
Microprocessor Board (Chapter 4, Section 2.1,Entering Calibration Mode,
p. 4-2).
3-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
The Calibration Mode/Debug Screen displays serial communications information throughout

the system.
Figure 3-9: The Calibration Mode/Debug Screen
The user uses the Calibration Screen #1 (below) to make changes to system calibration
values such as Filament Current.
Figure 3-10: Calibration Screen #1—Calibration Mode
P/N 9-500-0255 3-11

Service Manual
The user uses the Calibration Screen #2 to set up and calibrate the Automatic Exposure
Control system, including the AEC Gain, AEC Offset, and AEC Density. When Cal Screen #2
is selected, the system stays in Auto-Time Mode.
The user uses the calibration Screen #3 (below) to calibrate electro-mechanical systems and
perform the backup timer test. When setting CF CAL and SPECIAL commands, pressing Reset
+ Comp Rel sends the selected command.
3-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
The user uses the Calibration Screen #4 to set the X-ray tube type, perform AEC Gain
Calibration, set the wait time between exposures when in service mode, and set the Auto
Filter Threshold.
P/N 9-500-0255 3-13

Service Manual
Setting User Defaults
4.0 Setting User Defaults

The system parameters listed below are set up via the User Default Screen (Figure 3-7, p. 3-
9), using the Scroll and Change keys. For detailed instructions on setting these defaults, refer
to the Affinity Operator’s Manual.
Table 3-3: Setting User Defaults
Item Options Comments

Comp Release Manual/Auto If Auto is selected, compression
release occurs immediately after
exposure. If a Localization paddle is
installed, Automatic Compression
Release is disabled and the
Compression Release field displays
LOCKED-OUT
FULL Compression 10% - 100% Percentage of compression force
applied from 25-40 lb, in increments of
10%.
PRE Compression 10% - 100% Percentage of compression force
applied from 15-30 lb, in increments of
10%.
Comp Mode Full/Pre Sets the default compression mode.
Film ID None/Printer/AutoID/Rapid ID Sets the default labeling device.
Force Units Pounds/Newtons Toggles the format of the compression
force display.
Cassette Sense Off/On If enabled, prohibits exposure if
cassette has not been replaced or if a
cassette is not inserted.
Date mm/dd/yyyy Sets the system date.
dd.mm.yyyy Highlight the placeholder between
fields (forward slash or a dot) and press
a Change Key to toggle between US
and International date formats.
Time hh:mm AM/PM (12H) Sets the system time.
hh:mm (24H) Highlight the 12H or 24H field and
press a Change Key to toggle between
12-hour and 24-hour formats.
Note… When a localization paddle is installed, the system automatically disables

the motorized compression release function.
Note… When the Cassette Sense is set to ON, the system remains in Standby until a
new cassette is installed.
3-14 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Setting Exposure Technique Defaults
5.0 Setting Exposure Technique Defaults

The exposure techniques listed below are set up via the Exposure Default Screen (Figure 3-8,
p. 3-10), using the Scroll and Change keys. For detailed operating instructions on setting
these defaults, refer to the Affinity Operator’s Manual.
• Mode—Allows you to set the exposure mode the system defaults to upon startup.
The available choices are:
• Manual
• Auto-Time
• AUTO-kV
• Auto-Filter
• Mag Manual (applicable only when a magnification device is installed)
• Mag Auto-Time (applicable only when a magnification device is installed)
• Mag Auto-kV (applicable only when a magnification device is installed)
• kV—20 to 39 kV, dependent on filter selected
Note… At kVs above 32, maximum mAs is restricted to less than 500 mAs for large
focal spot and 150 mAs for small focal spot.
• mAs—Large FS, 3 to 500 mAs; Small FS, 3 to 150 mAs; manual exposures require
that the user set a fixed mAs for exposure timing.
• Density—+5 to Normal to -5 (not available in Manual or Mag Manual modes)
• Screen Film—Film 1, Film 2, Film 3
• Focus—Large or Small Focal Spot
• Auto-kV Window—When the exposure mode is set to Auto-kV or Auto-Filter the
system determines the exposure factors necessary to make films at the optimum
Optical Density (OD), with ideal contrast. To do this, the user must set a timing
“window” that determines when to terminate the exposure. The timing window
choices for Large FS are 125, 165, or 200 mAs and the choices for Small FS are 38,
50, or 60 mAs. The Auto timing window (based on breast thickness) should be
selected by those users who are required to meet the 2 mGy (200 mrad) maximum
average glandular dose requirement.
• Default Exposure Mode—Mode that system is set to at startup.
• Default Mag Mode—Displays default mode when a magnification device is
installed.
• Filter—Upon start up, Filter is always set to Molybdenum; user can change this
setting to Rhodium.
P/N 9-500-0255 3-15

Service Manual
Setting Exposure Technique Defaults
3-16 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Chapter 4: Calibrations and Performance Tests
Introduction
1.0 Introduction
This chapter contains the Affinity Series calibration, adjustment, and performance and
compliance test procedures.
Caution: Always observe Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precautions when working

with electronics and electronic components.
• Calibration Procedures (Section 2.0—Section 5.0)

• Performance Test Procedures (Section 6.0)
• X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment (Section 7.0)
• Mechanical Adjustments (Section 8.0)
Caution: X-Ray exposures made in rapid succession may exceed the thermal
capacity of the system. During periods of numerous X-ray exposures, such
as during service calibration or physicist accreditation, please wait a
minimum of 40 seconds between exposures to allow adequate cooling of
the X-ray tube and high voltage electronics.
2.0 Calibration Procedures

Use the procedures in this chapter to set up, test, and calibrate the mammography system’s
exposure generating system, the Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) system, C-arm Safety
Microprocessor Board, and the compression control system. On initial installation, always
perform the procedures in this section in the order that they are presented to ensure proper
setup and calibration.
To download Calibration Data to a Laptop Computer, refer to Chapter 5, Section 3.3, System
Data Retrieval, p. 5-12.
Warning: Service engineers must take appropriate radiation safety measures

when testing (or maintaining) the system.
Note… When servicing the Affinity, if a procedure instructs you to remove the
Gantry right-side cover or the tubehead covers, do not reinstall these covers
until all required procedures (for example, calibrations, adjustments, tests,
remove and replace, etc.) are completed.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-1

Service Manual
Calibration Procedures
2.1 Entering Calibration Mode

The Affinity Series has four calibration screens that setup and calibrate the X-ray generating
system, the AEC system, and the electro-mechanical sub-systems (compression force,
thickness, etc.).
To access the Calibration Mode screens (CAL SCREEN):
1. Turn off the system.
2. To access the Host Microprocessor Board (Figure 6-1, p. 6-2, #7), remove the Gantry
right-side panel. See Chapter 6, Section 2.1.1, Left and Right Side Panels, p. 6-4.
3. Locate DIP switch (S2) at the lower right side of the Host Microprocessor Board. Set the
system for the Service Mode (S2 switch 1 = ON). Table 4-1 shows all the switch settings
and their functions.
4. Turn the system on. When the Run Mode screen appears, the system is in the Service
Mode. The three user screens (Run Mode, User Default, and Exposure Default), the
Debug screen, and the four calibration screens (CAL SCREEN 1, CAL SCREEN 2, CAL
SCREEN 3, and CAL SCREEN 4) are now accessible by pressing Reset + Left Arrow or
Reset + Right Arrow.
Table 4-1: Microprocessor S2 DIP Switches
Switch Function (0=OFF/1=ON)

1 ON Service Mode/post exposure standby, 30, 45, or 60 sec selectable in CAL
SCREEN 4
OFF User Mode/20 sec standby
2 ON Disables CF and tubehead communication when not part of system
OFF Normal Operations
3 ON Disables X-ray Footswitch
OFF Enables X-ray Footswitch (Normal Operations)
4 ON Enables display of actual mAs in manual mode.
OFF Normal Operations
5 ON Enables Adaptive Filament Function
OFF Disables Adaptive Filament Function
6-8 --- Reserved for language (future use)
4-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
The fields for each calibration screen are described in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2: The Calibration Screens
Calibration Screen Field Comments

Calibration Screen #1 kV Shows selected kV or displays post-exposure kV in Auto-kV or
(Filament Screen) Auto-Filter modes
mAs Shows selected mAs or displays post-exposure mAs in Manual
and Auto Modes. Maximum selectable mAs is dependent upon
kV and Focal Spot.
FILTER Mo/Rh
MODE Manual: User selects kV, mAs, and Focal Spot Size.
Auto-Time: User selects kV, Screen-Film, and Focal Spot Size.
Auto-kV: System automatically selects kV and mAs. User selects
Screen-Film and Focal Spot Size.
Auto-Filter: Provides full automatic operation of all technique
factors. User selects Screen-Film.
SCREEN-FILM User selects film type (Film 1, 2, or 3)
FOCUS User selects Large or Small Focal Spot Size
FILAMENT On systems with HTC Buckys, used when performing reduced
mA calibration portion of Filament Current (mA) Calibration
Procedures (Section 4.3, p. 4-12).
AUTO CAL When set to ON during Filament Current (mA) Calibration
Procedures (Section 4.3, p. 4-12), the system automatically
Figure 4-1: Calibration Screen #1 adjusts the starting filament values.
Timer Test Used in Backup Timer Test (Section 4.4, p. 4-17) to verify the
Backup Timer is working properly.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-3

Service Manual
Table 4-2: The Calibration Screens (Continued)

Calibration Screen #2 (AEC Screen) kV Shows selected kV or displays post-exposure kV in Auto-Time
mode.
mAs Shows selected mAs or displays post-exposure mAs in Auto-
Time Mode. Maximum selectable mAs is dependent upon kV
and Focal Spot.
AEC GAIN
AEC OFFSET Used during AEC Calibration (Section 5.0, p. 4-19)
AEC-DENSITY
SCREEN-FILM User selects film type (Film 1, 2, or 3)
FOCUS User selects Large or Small Focal Spot Size
LgBcky
Used during AEC Calibration (Section 5.0, p. 4-19)
FACTOR
HTC Factor
Figure 4-2: Calibration Screen #2
4-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual

Calibration Screen #3 kV Shows selected kV or displays post-exposure kV in Auto-kV or
(C-arm Screen) Auto-Filter modes. Also used for kV Control Offset Calibration
(refer to Section 9.0, p. 4-64).
mAs Shows selected mAs or displays post-exposure mAs in Auto
Modes. Maximum selectable mAs is dependent upon kV and
Focal Spot.
CF CAL Used when calibrating the compression force sensing circuits for
accurate force display (Section 3.1, p. 4-7). Available selections
are 18 lb/80 N, 34 lb/151 N, Thickness, and Verify.
LOAD CELL Allows user to select type of Load Cell, REVERE or LC
CENTRAL.
Force Units Allows user to select NEWTONS or POUNDS.
PREAMP GAIN Factory set to 1, not adjustable.
SPECIAL Allows user to select additional service functions:
NONE SELECTED: No special functions selected.
INIT CAL DATA: Used to initialize Calibration data on the Host
Microprocessor Board (refer to Chapter 6, Section 2.3.1, Display
Microprocessor Board, p. 6-10)
CLEAR EXP CNT: Resets the Exposure Counter (refer to
Chapter 6, Section 3.2.2.1, Exposure Counter Reset, p. 6-42)
DOWNLOAD CAL: Used to download calibration data to a
Figure 4-3: Calibration Screen #3 laptop computer (refer to Chapter 5, Section 3.3, System Data
Retrieval, p. 5-12).
VIEW ERROR LOG: Used to view and/or download the Alert
Codes Log to a laptop computer (Chapter 5, Section 3.3, System
Data Retrieval, p. 5-12).
DENSITY STEP Sets Density Step value of 6, 8, 10, or 12.5%. Factory default to
10%.
HTC THK Used for calibration HTC Factor (Offset) (Section 5.16, p. 4-31).
Factory default to 3.5.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-5

Service Manual

Calibration Screen #4 TUBE TYPE Shows the type of X-ray Tube installed in the system: IM-113.
(Screen) Not selectable.
AEC Gain Cal Not selectable, factory set to OFF. Used for Factory calibration of
AEC Preamp Gain.
Svc Rdy Time Sets the wait time between exposures, when in service mode, to
30, 45, or 60 seconds.
Auto FIL TH Sets the Auto-Filter kV setting that determines when to switch
filters. This kV setting signals the system to switch to the Rh filter
when the kV is equal to or greater than the chosen setting.
Figure 4-4: Calibration Screen #4
Caution: Always return the system to the user mode (S2 switch 1 = OFF) after
performing calibrations to prevent inadvertent changes to system
calibrations.
4-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Compression System Calibration Procedures
3.0 Compression System Calibration Procedures

3.1 Compression Force Calibration
This procedure calibrates the compression force sensing circuits for accurate force display. Be
sure that the load cell selected is the type of load cell installed (see Table 4-2, p. 4-3). Note
that the load cell type is factory set and should never be changed unless the load cell is
replaced.
2. Remove the right side Gantry cover to access the Host Microprocessor Board.
3. Set the system for the service mode (S2 switch 1 = ON).
4. Turn the system on.
5. When the Run Mode appears, access CAL SCREEN 3 by pressing Reset + Left Arrow.
6. Remove any installed accessory from the Image Receptor Support Device.
7. Place a force gauge (or scale) on the IRSD. Center the scale laterally and position it 1.0
cm from chest wall edge.
8. Install the 18 x 24 cm screening compression paddle onto the compression device.
9. Highlight the CF Cal field using the Scroll keys.
10. Press a Change key until the field reads: 80 N (18 lb).
11. Place a towel on the gauge or scale to protect the compression accessory from scratches
or damage.
12. Use motorized compression to lower the compression device until the paddle just
touches the force gauge.
13. Use the manual
compression handwheels
to apply additional
compression until the
gauge or scale indicates
18 lb of force.
14. Press Reset + Comp.
Release at the same time to
send the 18 lb calibration
data to the microprocessor.
15. Press a Change key until
the field reads:
151 N (34 lb).
Apply additional manual
compression until the
gauge or scale indicates
151 N (34 lb) of force.
Figure 4-5: Compression Force Calibration Setup

16. Press Reset + Comp. Release at the same time to send the 151 N (34 lb) calibration data
to the microprocessor.
17. Raise the compression device off the gauge or scale, then remove the towel and gauge.
Perform the Compression Thickness calibration as described in Section 3.2, p. 4-8.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-7

Service Manual
Compression System Calibration Procedures
3.2 Compression Thickness Calibration

This procedure calibrates the compression thickness sensing circuits for accurate thickness
display. Note that this procedure requires that the compression force be calibrated first.
Always perform the compression thickness calibration procedure with an accurately
calibrated compression force display.
1. Set the system for the service mode (S2 switch 1 = ON).
2. Access CAL SCREEN 3.
3. Remove any installed accessory from the Image Receptor Support Device.
4. Highlight the CF Cal field using the Scroll keys.
5. Press a Change key until the field reads: “Thickness”.
6. Place 5.0 cm of acrylic on the image receptor support device.
7. Install the 18 x 24 cm
compression paddle on the
compression device.
8. Use motorized
compression to lower the
compression paddle until
it just touches the acrylic.
9. Use manual compression
to apply 133.5 N (30 lb) of
force onto the acrylic.
10. Press Reset + Comp.
Release at the same time to
send the compression
thickness calibration data
to the microprocessor.
11. Highlight the CF Cal field
using the Scroll keys.
Figure 4-6: Compression Thickness Calibration Setup
12. Press a Change key until the field reads: “Verify”.

13. Press Reset + Comp. Release at the same time to send the compression thickness
calibration data to the microprocessor.
14. Raise the compression paddle, and remove the acrylic from the receptor support.
15. Return the system to the user mode (S2 switch 1 = OFF).
4-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Exposure System Calibration
4.0 Exposure System Calibration

This section details the procedures required to calibrate the exposure-generating system.
4.1 Tube Voltage Calibration
This procedure sets the HV Generator Assembly so that the actual kV produced matches the
kV selected/indicated. Required for this test are:
• a high-voltage divider (10,000:1 or 1,000:1)
• a digital voltmeter
• an adapter cable to connect the voltage divider to the test receptacle on the system’s HV
Generator Assembly.
See Figure 4-7, p. 4-10 throughout the following procedures.
2. Remove the left and right side Gantry doors.
3. Locate the Host Microprocessor Board on the right side of the Gantry and set the system
for the Service Mode (S2 switch 1 = ON).
4. Locate the HV Generator Assembly on the left side of the Gantry. Wait approximately 6
minutes after turning the system off before proceeding (see WARNING below).
WARNING! To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not

attempt service until the LEDs D2 (Inverter Rail) and D35
(Brake Rail) on the HV Inverter Board are extinguished (this
takes approximately 5 minutes). Once the LEDs are
extinguished, do not proceed until an additional 1 minute has
elapsed.
5. Using a coaxial cable (#1) and a BNC to banana plug splitter (#4), connect a Digital
Multimeter (DMM, #2) to the anode terminal (#3) of the HV divider (#6). Position the
meter where it can be read from behind the protective Operator Radiation Shield.
6. Connect the HV divider’s ground wire (#8) to an unpainted metal surface on Gantry.
7. Connect one end of the HV Adapter cable (#10) into the voltage divider receptacle
(#11), and the opposite end into the HV test well (#12) on the HV Generator Assembly.
Note… Skip Step 9 when performing the Tube Voltage Calibration as part of the
initial installation procedures.
9. Perform the kV Control Offset Calibration Procedures, Section 9.0, p. 4-64
10. From the Run Mode, set the system for a Manual mode exposure at 30 kV, 150 mAs.
Monitor the voltmeter from behind the Operator Radiation Shield (if equipped), then
make the exposure.
11. The voltage reading on the voltmeter for 30 kV should be 3.0 VDC (±0.06 VDC using
10,000:1 voltage divider), or 30 VDC (±0.6 VDC using 1,000:1 voltage divider).
12. If the voltage reading is not within the specification above, adjust R41 on the HV Control
Filament Board, which is just below the HV Inverter Board on the HV Generator
Assembly. See Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-8. Using a screwdriver, turn R41 clockwise to
increase kV, or counter-clockwise to decrease kV.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-9

Service Manual
13. Repeat Steps 9, 10, and 11 until the voltage reading at 30 kV is +2% of the VDC
specified in Step 11.
14. Set the system for a Manual mode exposure at 39 kV, 80 mAs, Rh filter. Monitor the
voltmeter from behind the Operator Radiation Shield, then make the exposure.
15. The voltage reading on the voltmeter for 39 kV should be 3.9 VDC (±0.078 VDC using
10,000:1 voltage divider), or 39 VDC (±0.78 VDC using 1,000:1 voltage divider).
16. If the voltage reading is not within the specification above, readjust R41 on the HV
Control Filament Board.
17. Repeat the exposure and test the voltage reading. Repeat Steps 14, 15, and 16 until the
voltage reading at 39 kV is within the ±2% specification.
Figure 4-7: High Voltage Generator Calibration Setup

1. Coaxial Cable
2. Digital Multimeter
3. Anode
4. BNC to Banana Plug Splitter
5. Ground side of splitter (Side of splitter with “Tab” must be connected to Common.)
6. High Voltage Divider
7. Cathode
8. Ground wire (Attach this end of ground wire to unpainted metal surface on the Gantry.)
9. Gantry
10. HV Adapter Cable
11. Voltage Divider Receptacle
12. HV Test Well
13. mA Current Jack (not shown, on left side of the HV Multiplier)
14. HV Inverter Board
15. HV Control Filament Board
18. Test the voltage at 20 kV to verify that it remained within the ±2% specification. If
necessary continue to make adjustments at 20 kV, then at 39 kV until calibration at both
levels is achieved.
4-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
19. Select intermediate kV levels and make an exposure at each setting. Confirm that the
voltage readings on the meter are within 2% of the kV setting. If they are not, make small
adjustments at 20 kV and 39 kV to “dial” in the intermediate kV levels while maintaining
the ±2% at all kVs.
20. For initial setup and calibration, skip this step. If all service procedures have been
completed, return the system to the user mode (S2 switch 1 = OFF), and reinstall all
previously removed covers and panels.
Figure 4-8: HV Control Filament Board
P/N 9-500-0255 4-11

Service Manual
4.2 Test mA Calibration

Test the mA calibration as follows:
1. Turn the system off. Wait approximately 6 minutes before proceeding (see WARNING
below).

elapsed.
2. On the HV Multiplier, connect a Digital Multimeter (set to current) to the mA Current

Jack (Figure 4-7, #13).
3. Make an exposure at 30 kV, manual mode, 100 mAs.
4. The meter should read 100 mA. If not, adjust R2 on the HV Control/Filament Board.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the meter reads 100 mA.
4.3 Filament Current (mA) Calibration

This procedure sets the filament current to produce the desired mA at each kV station for the
large and small focal spots in the Affinity. This procedure also calibrates the reduced mA at
each kV station for large focal spot using an HTC Bucky.
Adaptive Filament—This function allows you to make small adjustments to the filament DAC
value when necessary each time you make an exposure. Turning switch # 5 (S2) on enables
the function. This function is designed to keep the starting mA correct, as parameters vary
over time. It is recommended that you enable this function.
Note… This feature is automatically disabled when Filament Current Calibration

(AUTO CAL) is on.
Note… This calibration must be performed using Manual Exposure mode only.
2. Remove the Gantry’s right side panel (to access the Host Microprocessor Board).
3. Connect an oscilloscope to the mA Sense Test Point on the Host Microprocessor Board.
4. On the Host Microprocessor Board, set the system for the service mode (S2 switch 1 =
ON).
6. After the Run Mode screen displays, highlight the Filter field, and select the Mo filter.
7. From the Run Mode screen, access CAL SCREEN 1 by pressing Reset + Right Arrow four
times.
8. Highlight the Auto Cal field, then press a Change key until the field reads: ON.
9. Highlight and change the appropriate fields to set the system for a Manual mode
exposure at 20 kV, 40 mAs, Large Focal Spot.
4-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
10. Make an exposure. The system automatically adjusts the starting filament values. Wait
60 seconds, and make a second exposure. Wait 60 seconds, and make a third exposure.
After each exposure, examine the waveform on the oscilloscope for undershoot or
overshoot (Figure 4-9). Verify that the waveform appears stable and is at the correct
amplitude for the set kV as shown in Table 4-3).
Figure 4-9: Example—Filament Waveforms Pattern
P/N 9-500-0255 4-13

Service Manual
Notes… To fully calibrate the system, you must make 3 exposures (at 40 second
intervals between shots).
The mA Target (“T”) value and the mA Start (“ST”) value displayed at the
bottom of CAL SCREEN 1. The difference between the start value and the
target value should be less than 10.
11. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for each kV station using the Large focal spot and Mo filter, then
perform this procedure for each kV station using the Small focal spot, Mo filter, and 12
mAs. Record the values for each kV station on Table 4-3.
Note… Three exposures are required to properly calibrate the mA at each kV

station.
12. Go to the Run Mode screen and switch to the Rhodium filter then repeat steps 11 and 12
for kV stations 28 kV through 39 kV for both the Large (40 mAs) and the Small (12 mAs)
focal spots. After each exposure, examine the waveform on the oscilloscope for
undershoot or overshoot (Figure 4-9). Verify that the waveform appears stable, and is at
the correct amplitude for the set kV as shown in Table 4-3.
13. Record the values for each kV station on Table 4-3.
14. For systems with HTC Buckys, perform reduced mA calibration below. Proceed to Step
17 if the system is not equipped with HTC Buckys. Installation of a Bucky is not
necessary to complete this test.
a Go to the Run Mode screen and switch to the Mo filter.
b Access the CAL SCREEN 1, Auto Cal field should read ON.
c Highlight and change the appropriate fields to set the system for a MANUAL mode
exposure at 20 kV, 12 mAs, Large focus.
d Highlight the Filament field and then press Reset + Compression Up at the same
time. (This places you in reduced mA calibration mode.)
e Install an HTC Bucky on the IRSD, if the system is so equipped.
f Step behind the Operator Radiation Shield and make an exposure. (The system
automatically adjusts the starting filament values.) Wait 40 seconds, and make a
second exposure. Wait 40 seconds, and make a third exposure. After each exposure,
examine the waveform on the oscilloscope for undershoot or overshoot (Figure 4-9).
Verify that the waveform appears stable and is at the correct amplitude for the set kV
as shown in Table 4-3. Record the reduced mA for each station on Table 4-4.
15. Highlight the Auto Cal field and set to off.
16. For initial setup and calibration, skip this step and proceed directly to Section 4.4, Step
5. If all service procedures have been completed, remove the oscilloscope probe from
the test points. Set the system back to the user mode (S2 switch 1 = OFF), then reinstall
previously removed covers and panels.
4-14 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Table 4-3: Filament Waveforms Amplitude
Large Focal Spot Large Focal Spot

Small Focal Spot (Mo) Small Focal Spot (Rh)
(Mo) (Rh)
kV ma Results mA Results ma Results mA Results
20 kV 75 --- 20 ---
21 kV 80 --- 22 ---
22 kV 85 --- 24 ---
23 kV 90 --- 26 ---
24 kV 95 --- 28 ---
25 kV 100 --- 30 ---
26 kV 100 --- 30 ---
27 kV 100 --- 30 ---
28 kV 100 100 30 30
29 kV 100 100 30 30
30 kV 100 100 30 30
31 kV 100 100 30 30
32 kV 100 100 30 30
33 kV 85 85 28 28
34 kV 80 80 28 28
35 kV 80 80 26 26
36 kV --- 75 --- 26
37 kV --- 75 --- 26
38 kV --- 70 --- 24
39 kV --- 70 --- 24
P/N 9-500-0255 4-15

Service Manual
Table 4-4: Reduced mA Filament Waveform Amplitude
Large Focal Spot (Mo) Large Focal Spot (Rh)

Reduced Reduced
kV Results Results
ma ma
20 kV 20 ---
21 kV 22 ---
22 kV 24 ---
23 kV 26 ---
24 kV 28 ---
25 kV 30 ---
26 kV 30 ---
27 kV 30 ---
28 kV 30 30
29 kV 30 30
30 kV 30 30
31 kV 30 30
32 kV 30 30
33 kV 28 28
34 kV 28 28
35 kV --- 26
36 kV --- 26
37 kV --- 26
38 kV --- 24
39 kV --- 24
4-16 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
4.4 Backup Timer Test

Perform this procedure at initial installation, or after replacing the Host Microprocessor
Board to ensure that the Backup Timer is working properly. This test attempts to generate a 7
second exposure. The Backup Timer must detect that the exposure duration has exceeded
the maximum and terminate the exposure immediately.
Note… This test does not generate radiation.

2. Remove the Gantry’s right side panel (to access the Host Microprocessor Board) as
described in Chapter 6, Section 2.1.1, Left and Right Side Panels, p. 6-4.
3. On the Host Microprocessor Board, set the system for the service mode (S2 switch 1 = ON).
5. Access CAL SCREEN 1.
6. Highlight the Timer Test field using the Scroll keys. Press a Change key until the field
reads: ON.
8. On the Host Microprocessor Board, verify jumpers are positioned as follows (if not,
install jumpers):
• JP5 between positions 1 and 2
• JP6 between positions 1 and 2
9. Install a DIP clip on U20 and connect scope lead to Pin 2. Connect the ground lead to
TP12 (DGND).
10. Turn the System on.
11. Set up scope as follows:
• Volts/DIV: 2.00 V
• Time/DIV: 2.00 sec
• Mode: AUTO
Figure 4-10: Example—Backup Timer Time-out Signal

12. Set the time-out to 6.3 +0.25 seconds as follows (see Figure 4-10):
a Trigger U20 by momentarily shorting U11 Pin 1 to U11 Pin 2.
b While viewing signal on scope, adjust Potentiometer R146 on the Host
Microprocessor Board.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-17

Service Manual
Note… During the next step, the system does not take X-rays and attempts a 7.0 sec
exposure.
13. Make an exposure.
14. When the exposure terminates, the message area along the lower part of the screen
indicates the exposure duration (when the timer terminated the exposure), and the status
of the test.
15. Verify that the test “PASSED”. If the indication is “FAILED”, immediately take corrective
action to repair the system. Do not use the system clinically.
16. The Timer Test field automatically resets to OFF.
17. Remove all test equipment, do not remove jumpers JP5 and JP6.
18. Return the system to the user mode (S2 switch 1 = OFF) and reinstall previously removed
panels if this is not the initial installation
4-18 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Automatic Exposure Control System Calibration
5.0 Automatic Exposure Control System Calibration

The following sub-sections are provided to calibrate the Automatic Exposure Control (AEC)
System. Be sure the Exposure Generating System (kV and mA) is properly adjusted prior to
calibrating AEC. See Section 4.0.
Note… AEC adjustment may be required if film or film cassettes, chemistry, or

processor settings (for example, temperature or replenishment rates) have
been changed.
Calibration of the AEC is performed at the factory to assure that the system is capable of
proper calibration and performance. At installation, the AEC must be adjusted to obtain films
of the proper mean OD (typically 1.6 OD ±0.15 OD depending on the radiologist’s
preference) using the site’s processing equipment. The HTC Factor is set to a number
determined by performing the HTC Factor (Offset) Adjustment prior to leaving the factory.
Do not change the HTC Factor prior to performing AEC Calibration as part of the initial
installation procedures. The AEC Pre-Amp Gain (shown on CAL SCREEN 3) is factory set to 1
and is not selectable or adjustable.
Note… This procedure must be performed for each film type used with the system.
Before performing the AEC Calibration procedure, be sure you have
completed the Tube Voltage Calibration and the Filament Calibration in
Section 4.0.
AEC system performance is specified at the kVs that are normally used clinically. Table 4-5 is
a guideline for typical clinical values.
Table 4-5: Typical Clinical Values for Breast Composition and Thickness
Thickness Fatty (kV) 50/50 (kV) Dense (kV)

2.0 cm 23-24 24-25 25-26
4.0 cm 25-26 26-27 27-28
6.0 cm 26-27 27-28 29-30
2.0 cm thickness imaging should not be used above 26 kV; 6.0 cm thickness should not be
used below 26 kV.
Notes… When calibrating the AEC system, always use the same Bucky device and
the same cassette to ensure consistent results.
For optimum calibration results use the AEC Worksheets provided at the
end of this procedure (Table 4-6 through Table 4-12). Record the AEC
performance values on the worksheets when the AEC system is calibrated.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-19

Service Manual
5.1 AEC Detector Gain Calibration

When the AEC Detector Assembly or the X-ray Tube is replaced, the following procedures
must be performed.
1. Remove the Gantry’s right side panel (to access the Host Microprocessor board) as
described in, Chapter 6, Section 2.1.1, Left and Right Side Panels, p. 6-4.
2. Install the 18 x 24 cm Bucky onto the IRSD, insert a loaded cassette, and install a
compression paddle.
3. Place 2.0 cm or BR-12 or PMMA on the Bucky so it covers the AEC detector.
4. Set the system for a Manual exposure at 30 kV, 50 mAs.
5. Connect an Oscilloscope 10 x 1 probe to TP33 (AEC) on the Host Microprocessor board,
connect the probe ground to TP25 (AGND). Set the oscilloscope as follows:
• Sweep Time = 10 msec per division
• Vertical Sensitivity = 2 V per division
• Trigger Mode = Normal, with positive-going edge trigger
6. Make an exposure and record the voltage at 25 msec after the trigger point on the
oscilloscope. The recorded voltage should be between 9.2 to 9.8 VDC.
7. If the Detector reading is less than 9.8 VDC, adjust the AEC Detector board resistor R1 as
described in Section 5.2.
5.2 AEC Detect Board—R1 Adjustment

The current value resistor R1 is used to calculate the correct value for the replacement
resistor. Perform the R1 resistor value calculation as follows:
1. Note the result of the voltage test in Step 6 of Section 5.1 above.
2. Remove the AEC Detector Assembly as described in Chapter 6, Section 3.4.2, AEC
Detector Assembly, p. 6-61.
3. Set the assembly on its side with the sensor windows on the top plate facing forward.
Remove the 6 screws securing the AEC Cover to the detector assembly.
4. Remove the cover and set aside, taking care not to touch the film covering the sensors.
5. Remove the 2 screws securing the D-sub connector to the end of the AEC Detector
Assembly. Remove the connector.
6. Remove the 4 screws securing the AEC Detect board to the AEC Detector Assembly.
Remove the board.
7. Measure the resistance across R1 and calculate the replacement value using the
following formula:
9.50 ÷ (result noted in Step 1) x value of current R1 = replacement resistor
value
Example: 9.50 ÷ 11.0 VDC x 1.4 kΩ = 1.2 kΩ
Note… The replacement resistor value typically falls within the 1.0 kΩ to 1.7 kΩ
range.
8. Replace R1 on the AEC Detect board with a 1/4 Watt, metal film, 1% resistor with the
value determined in Step 7 above.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to install the AEC Detector Assembly.
10. Perform the procedure: Section 5.1, AEC Detector Gain Calibration.
4-20 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5.3 Initial Calibration—Large Focal Spot (Mo)

This procedure makes Gain and Offset adjustments to the AEC system for large focal spot
exposures. Exposures used to adjust the Offset must be taken between 240 mAs and 350
mAs, and exposures used to adjust the Gain must be taken between 40 and 80 mAs. Always
make sample exposures, then adjust the amount of attenuation to achieve the proper mAs
before making Gain or Offset adjustments.
1. Go to Step 3 for systems with no HTC Bucky, systems with HTC Bucky, go to Step 2.
Note… For large focal spot calibration with an HTC Bucky, the system must be in 100
mA mode. Ensure the HTC Threshold is low enough to remain in this mode.
2. Set system to CAL SCREEN 3, set the HTC C-THK threshold for 1.0 cm.
3. Set system to CAL SCREEN 2.
4. Install the 18 x 24 cm Bucky onto the IRSD and insert a loaded cassette. Always use the
same cassette and Bucky for all calibration steps.
5. Set the system for an Auto-Time exposure at 25 kV, Large focus, Mo filter.
6. Set the Film field to the screen-film combination loaded in the cassette.
7. Place 3.0 cm of BR-12 or PMMA acrylic (BEM) on the Bucky, centered laterally, and
extending approximately 1.0 cm over the chest wall edge.
8. Place the AEC detector in the position closest to the chest wall.
9. Make an exposure, develop the film, then measure the OD.
Note… Always measure the OD with the lower edge of the film flush with the front
edge of the Densitometer and centered side-to-side (approximately 5.0 cm
into film plane).
10. Make Gain adjustments to calibrate the OD to the value requested by the customer.
11. Increase the Gain value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs requirements (40 - 80
mAs), it may be necessary to increase or decrease the amount of BR-12 or PMMA used.
12. Make another exposure, develop the film, then measure the OD.
13. Repeat Steps 10—12 as necessary, to obtain the mean OD requirement (±0.15 OD).
14. Replace the 3.0 cm BEM with the 6.0 cm BEM.
15. Using the same techniques as in Steps 10—12, make an exposure, develop the film, then
measure the OD.
16. Make Offset adjustments to calibrate the OD to the value requested by the customer.
17. Increase the Offset value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs requirements (240 - 350
mAs), it may be necessary to increase or decrease the amount of BR-12 or PMMA used.
19. Repeat Steps 16—18 as necessary, to obtain the mean OD requirement (±0.15 OD).
20. Replace the 6.0 cm BEM with the 3.0 cm BEM, make an exposure, develop the film,
then measure the OD.
21. Ensure the OD reading is within ±0.15 OD of the exposure at 6.0 cm.
22. If necessary, repeat the entire procedure to bring both the 3.0 cm and the 6.0 cm
exposures within the specified requirements.
23. Change the Gain, Offset and M-Density (if required) values for each of the remaining
large focal kV stations to the Gain, Offset, and M-Density values obtained in this
procedure.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-21

Service Manual
5.4 kV Tracking—Large Focal Spot (Mo)

This procedure ensures that the AEC system produces proper OD films with 5.0 cm of
attenuation.
1. Place 5 cm of BR-12 or PMMA on a loaded Bucky device, centered laterally, positioned
1.0 cm over the chest wall edge.
2. Set the system for an Auto-Time exposure, Large focal, Mo filter.
Note… While in CAL SCREEN 2, the exposure mode is automatically set to Auto-
Time.
3. Make exposures at 25 kV, 26 kV, 27 kV, 28 kV, 29 kV, and 30 kV. Measure the OD
tracking of each film.
4. If necessary, adjust Gain and Offset at each kV station to maintain OD within ±0.15
O.D. of the Mean Value (Initial Calibration - Large Focus).
Note… When calibrating with high-speed contrast film, each kV station needs
verification and input of the Gain, Offset, and AEC Density.
5. If the customer uses more than one film type, repeat this procedure for each one.
5.5 Initial Calibration—Large Focal Spot (Rh)

This procedure makes Gain and Offset adjustments to the AEC system for large focal spot
exposures. Exposures used to adjust the Offset must be taken between 240 mAs and 350
mAs, and exposures used to adjust the Gain must be taken between 40 and 80 mAs. Always
before making Gain or Offset adjustments.
5.5.1 Gain Adjustment

1. Go to Step 3 for systems with no HTC Bucky, systems with HTC Bucky, go to
Step 2.
Note… For large focal spot calibration with an HTC Bucky, the system must be in
100 mA mode. Ensure the HTC Threshold is low enough to remain in this
mode.
2. Set system to CAL SCREEN 3, set the HTC C-THK threshold for 1.0 cm.
4. Install the 18 x 24 cm Bucky onto the IRSD and insert a loaded cassette. Always
use the same cassette and Bucky for all calibration steps.
5. Set the system for an Auto-Time exposure at 28 kV, Large focal spot, Rh filter. Set
the Film field to the screen-film combination loaded in the cassette.
6. Place 3.5 cm of BR-12 or PMMA (BEM) on the Bucky, centered laterally, and
extending approximately 1.0 cm over the chest wall edge.
7. Place the AEC detector in the position closest to the chest wall. Make an
exposure, develop the film, then measure the OD.
into film plane).
8. Make Gain adjustments to calibrate the OD to the value requested by the
customer. Decrease the Gain value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs
requirements (40 - 80 mAs), it may be necessary to increase or decrease the
amount of BR-12 or PMMA used.
4-22 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 as needed, to obtain the mean OD requirement (±0.15 OD).
5.5.2 Offset Adjustment
1. Replace the 3.5 cm absorber BEM the 7.0 cm BEM. Using the same techniques
as in Steps 8 and 9 of the previous procedure, make an exposure, develop the
film, then measure the OD.
2. Make Offset adjustments to calibrate the OD to the value requested by the
customer. Decrease the Offset value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs
amount of BR-12 or PMMA used.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary, to obtain the mean OD requirement (±0.15
OD).
5. Replace the 7.0 cm BEM with the 3.5 cm BEM, make an exposure, develop the
film, then measure the OD. Ensure the OD reading is within ±0.15 OD of the
exposure at 7.0 cm. If necessary, repeat the entire procedure to bring both the
3.5 cm and the 7.0 cm exposures within the specified requirements.
6. Change the Gain, Offset and M-Density (if required) values for each of the
remaining large focus kV stations to the Gain, Offset, and M-Density values
obtained in the Gain Adjustment and Offset Adjustment procedures.
5.6 kV Tracking—Large Focal Spot (Rh)

This procedure ensures that the AEC system produces proper OD films at intermediate kV
levels, large focal spot, with 5.0 to 6.0 cm of attenuation.
1. Place 5.0 to 6.0 cm of BR-12 or PMMA on a loaded Bucky device, centered laterally,
positioned 1.0 cm over the chest wall edge.
2. On the Run Mode screen, set the system for Auto-Time, Large focal, Rh filter.
3. Make exposures at 28 kV, 29 kV, 30 kV, 31 kV, and 32 kV. Measure the OD tracking for
each film.
4. If necessary, adjust Gain and Offset at each kV station to maintain OD within ±0.15
O.D. of the Mean Value (Initial Calibration - Large Focus).
Note… When calibrating with high-speed contrast film, each kV station needs
verification and input of the Gain, Offset, and AEC Density.
5.7 Starting AEC Values—Large Focal Spot

This procedure inputs recommended starting AEC values for 20 - 24 kV, and for 31 - 39 kV
for the Large focus.
1. On CAL SCREEN 2, input the values for Gain, Offset, and AEC Density used at 25 kV
into the corresponding fields for 20 through 24 kV.
2. Input the values for Gain, Offset, and AEC Density used at 32 kV into the corresponding
fields for 33 through 35 kV.
3. Select the Rhodium (Rh) filter (Run Mode screen). Input the values for Gain, Offset, and
AEC Density used at 32 kV for each corresponding value at 33 through 39 kV.
4. Re-select the Molybdenum filter.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-23

Service Manual
5.8 Performance Test—Large Focal Spot (Mo)

This procedure ensures that the AEC system consistently produces films at the required
Optical Density (+0.15 OD) using the Mo filter.
1. Make an exposure using the ACR Mammographic Phantom thicknesses and kV
combinations shown in Table 4-6: AEC Performance Worksheet—Large Focal Spot, Mo
Filter. In the space provided, record the mAs and OD values.
2. Verify that the maximum OD deviation on each film does not exceed ±0.15 OD. If it
does, repeat the Gain and Offset adjustments for the kVs that are out of tolerance.
Note… Do not readjust Gain or Offset at 26 kV (initial calibration).
Table 4-6: AEC Performance Worksheet—Large Focal Spot, Mo Filter
18 x 24 cm Bucky/ Gain - Lower Thickness = 40 to

Large Focal Spot Paddle/BR-12 80 mAs
0.030 mm Molybdenum Filter KODAK MIN-R-2000 Offset - Higher Thickness = 240
Film/Cassette to 350 mAs
Recommended
kV mA mAs OD Gain/Offset Max/-1.0 cm mAs OD
Thickness
24 95 3.0 cm G= 4.0 cm
24 95 5.0 cm O=
25 100 3.5 cm G= 4.5 cm
25 100 5.5 cm O=
26 100 4.0 cm G= 5.0 cm
26 100 6.0 cm O=
27 100 4.0 cm G= 5.5 cm
27 100 6.5 cm O=
28 100 4.5 cm G= 6.0 cm
28 100 7.0 cm O=
29 100 4.5 cm G= 6.5 cm
29 100 7.5 cm O=
30 100 5.0 cm G= 7.0 cm
30 100 8.0 cm O=
31 100 5.0 cm G= 7.5 cm
31 100 8.5 cm O=
32 100 5.5 cm G= 8.0 cm
32 100 9.0 cm O=
Note… Adjust thickness as necessary to achieve desired results.
4-24 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5.9 Performance Test—Large Focal Spot (Rh)

Optical Density (within 0.15 OD) using the Rh filter.
1. On the Run Mode screen, select the Rhodium filter (refer to Table 4-7: AEC Performance
Worksheet—Large Focal Spot, Rh Filter).
2. Make Rh filtered exposures at 28 through 32 kV. Measure the OD of each film to ensure
that it is within ±0.15 OD of the mean OD.
3. If necessary, make Gain and Offset adjustments. Use BEM thicknesses to make Gain
adjustments between 40 and 80 mAs. Use BEM thicknesses to make Offset adjustments
between 200 mAs and 350 mAs.
Note… It may be necessary to use BEM thicknesses greater than 6.0 cm to achieve
the desired mAs when calibrating AEC using the Rhodium filter at higher
kVs.
Table 4-7: AEC Performance Worksheet—Large Focal Spot, Rh Filter
SRL 2000 Bucky/ Gain - Lower Thickness = 40 to

Large Focal Spot Paddle/BR-12 80 mAs
0.025 mm Rhodium Filter KODAK MIN-R-2000 Offset - Higher Thickness = 240
Recommended
kV mA mAs OD Gain/Offset Max/-1.0 cm mAs OD
Thickness
28 100 4.5 cm G= 6.0 cm
28 100 7.0 cm O=
29 100 4.5 cm G= 6.5 cm
29 100 7.5 cm O=
30 100 5.0 cm G= 7.0 cm
30 100 8.0 cm O=
31 100 5.0 cm G= 7.0 cm
31 100 8.0 cm O=
32 100 5.5 cm G= 7.5 cm
32 100 8.5 cm O=
P/N 9-500-0255 4-25

Service Manual
5.10 Initial Calibration—Small Focal Spot (Mo)

This procedure makes Gain and Offset adjustments to the AEC system for small focal spot
exposures. Exposures used to adjust the offset must be taken between 65 mAs and 130 mAs,
and exposures used to adjust the gain must be taken between 6 mAs and 14 mAs. Always
take sample exposures, then adjust the amount of attenuation to achieve the proper mAs
before making gain or offset adjustments.
Note… Before starting this procedure, select the small focal spot, then set the Gain
and Offset values to the values used at 25 kV for the Large Focal spot.
1. Remove the Bucky device and install the Magnification Table or cassette holder
and Mag Platform. Always use the same cassette for all AEC calibrations.
2. On the Run Mode screen set the system for an exposure at 25 kV, Small focal
spot, Mo filter, Mag Auto-Time.
3. Place 2.0 cm of BR-12 or PMMA on the breast platform, centered laterally, and
extending 1.0 cm over the chest wall edge.
4. Place the AEC detector in position #1 (closest to the chest wall). Make an
exposure, develop the film, and measure the OD.
into film plane).
5. Make Gain adjustments as necessary to calibrate the OD target value. Increase
the Gain value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs requirements (6 - 14
mAs), it is necessary to increase or decrease the amount of BR-12 or PMMA
used. See Table 4-8 and Table 4-9.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 as necessary, to obtain the mean OD requirement (±0.15
OD).
1. Replace the BEM used for the Gain adjustments with the 5.0 cm BEM. Using the
same techniques as in Steps 5 and 6 of the previous procedure, make an
customer. Increase the Offset value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs
amount of BEM used.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary, to obtain the target OD requirement (±0.15
OD).
exposure at 5.0 cm. See Table 4-8 and Table 4-9.
6. If necessary, repeat the entire procedure to bring both the Gain and the Offset
exposures within the specified requirements.
7. Change the Gain, Offset, and M-Density (if required) values for each of the
remaining small focal spot kV stations to the Gain, Offset, and M-Density values
obtained in this procedure.
4-26 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5.11 kV Tracking - Small Focal Spot (Mo)

This procedure ensures that the AEC system produces proper OD films at intermediate kV
levels, small focus, with 4.0 cm of attenuation.
1. Place 4.0 cm of BEM on the Magnification Table - centered laterally - positioned 1.0 cm
over the chest wall edge.
2. On the Run Mode screen, set the system for an Auto-Time exposure, Small focal spot,
Mo filter.
3. Make exposures at 25 through 30 kV. Measure the OD tracking each film.
4. If necessary, go to the CAL SCREENs and adjust Gain and Offset, as required, at each kV
station to maintain OD within ±0.15 OD of the target OD value.
5. Remove the Magnification Table.
5.12 Initial Calibration—Small Focal Spot (Rh)

This procedure makes Gain and Offset adjustments to the AEC system for Small focal spot
exposures. Exposures used to adjust the offset must be taken between 65 mAs and 130 mAs,
and exposures used to adjust the gain must be taken between 6 mAs and 14 mAs. Always
before making gain or offset adjustments.
Note… Before starting this procedure, on CAL SCREEN 2, select the small focus,
then set the Gain and Offset values to the values used at 26 kV for the Large
Focal spot.
1. Set the system for an exposure at 28 kV, Small focal spot, Rh filter, Mag Auto-
Time.
2. Place 2.5 cm of BR-12 or PMMA on the Magnification Table or cassette holder,
centered laterally, and extending 1.0 cm over the chest wall edge.
3. Place the AEC detector in the position closest to the chest wall. Make an
into film plane).
4. Make Gain adjustments to calibrate the OD to the value requested by the
customer. Decrease the Gain value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs
amount of BR-12 or PMMA (BEM) used.
OD).
P/N 9-500-0255 4-27

Service Manual

1. Replace the 2.5 cm BEM from the Gain adjustment with 6.0 cm BEM. Using the
same techniques as in Steps 5 and 6 of the previous procedure, make an
customer. Decrease the Offset value if the density is too high. To maintain mAs
amount of BEM used.
OD).
exposure at 6.0 cm. If necessary, repeat the entire procedure to bring both the
2.5 cm and the 6.0 cm exposures within the specified requirements.
6. Change the Gain, Offset, and M-Density (if required) values for each of the
remaining small focal spot kV stations to the Gain, Offset, and M-Density values
obtained in this procedure.
5.13 Starting AEC Values - Small Focal Spot

This procedure inputs recommended starting AEC values for 22 through 24 kV, and for 31
through 39 kV for the Small focus.
1. On CAL SCREEN 2, input the values for Gain, Offset and AEC Density used at 25 kV into
the corresponding fields for 20 through 24 kV for Mo.
2. On CAL SCREEN 2, input the values for Gain, Offset and AEC Density used at 30 kV into
the corresponding fields for 31 through 35 kV for Mo.
3. Select the Rhodium (Rh) filter. Input the values for Gain, Offset, and M-Density used at
32 kV into the corresponding fields for 33 through 39 kV for Rh.
4. Re-select the Molybdenum filter.
4-28 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5.14 Performance Test - Small Spot (Mo)

Optical Density (within 0.15 OD) using the Mo filter. The setup for this procedure is on CAL
SCREEN 2.
1. Make a small focal spot exposure using the ACR Mammographic Phantom thicknesses
and kV combinations shown in Table 4-8. In the space provided in the table, record the
mAs and OD values.
2. Verify that the maximum OD deviation on each film does not exceed ±0.15 OD. If it
does, repeat the Gain and Offset adjustments for the kVs that are out of tolerance.
3. If the customer uses more than one film type, repeat this procedure for each one.
Note… Do not readjust Gain or Offset at 26 kV (initial calibration).
Table 4-8: AEC Performance Worksheet—Small Focal Spot, Mo Filter
Gain - Lower Thickness = 6 to

Mag Table/Paddle/BR-12
Small Focal Spot 14 mAs
KODAK MIN-R-2000 Film/
0.030 mm Molybdenum Filter Offset - Higher Thickness = 65
Cassette
to 130 mAs
Recommended
kV mA mAs OD Gain/Offset Max/-1 cm mAs OD
Thickness
24 28 1.5 cm G= 3.5 cm
24 28 4.5 cm O=
25 30 2.0 cm G= 3.5 cm
25 30 4.5 cm O=
26 30 2.0 cm G= 4.0 cm
26 30 5.0 cm O=
27 30 2.5 cm G= 4.5 cm
27 30 5.5 cm O=
28 30 2.5 cm G= 5.0 cm
28 30 6.0 cm O=
29 30 3.0 cm G= 5.5 cm
29 30 6.5 cm O=
30 30 3.0 cm G= 5.5 cm
30 30 6.5 cm O=
31 30 3.5 cm G= 6.0 cm
31 30 7.0 cm O=
32 30 3.5 cm G= 6.5 cm
32 30 7.5 cm O=
P/N 9-500-0255 4-29

Service Manual
5.15 Performance Test - Small Spot (Rh)

Optical Density (within 0.15 OD) using the Rh filter, small focus.
1. Select the Rhodium filter.
2. On CAL SCREEN 2, Enter the values for Gain, Offset, and AEC Density obtained for the
Mo filter (Table 4-8) as the starting values for the Rh filter.
3. Make Rh filtered exposures at 28 through 32 kV. Measure the OD of each film to ensure
that it is within ±0.15 OD of the mean OD.
4. If necessary, make Gain and Offset adjustments. Use BEM thicknesses to make Gain
adjustments between 7 mAs and 10 mAs. Use BEM thicknesses to make Offset
adjustments between 70 mAs and 100 mAs. Record the mAs and OD values in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9: AEC Performance Worksheet—Small Focal Spot, Rh Filter
Mag Table/Paddle/BR- Gain - Lower Thickness = 6 to

Small Focal Spot 12 14 mAs
0.025 mm Rhodium Filter KODAK MIN-R-2000 Offset - Higher Thickness = 65
Recommended
kV mA mAs OD Gain/Offset Max/-1 cm mAs OD
Thickness
28 30 2.5 cm G= 5.0 cm
28 30 6.0 cm O=
29 30 3.0 cm G= 5.5 cm
29 30 6.5 cm O=
30 30 3.0 cm G= 5.5 cm
30 30 6.5 cm O=
31 30 3.5 cm G= 6.0 cm
31 30 7.0 cm O=
32 30 3.5 cm G= 6.5 cm
32 30 7.5 cm O=
4-30 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5.16 HTC Factor (Offset) Calibration

This procedure is only applicable for those systems with an HTC Bucky.
1. Set system to CAL SCREEN 3, set the HTC C-THK threshold for 6.0.
3. Set the system for an Auto-Time exposure at 26 kV, Large focus, Mo filter. Set the Film
field to the screen-film combination loaded in the cassette.
4. Place the amount of BR-12 or PMMA acrylic that was used in the final 26 kV, low
attenuation exposure from Table 4-6 on the Bucky, centered laterally, and extending
approximately 1.0 cm over the chest wall edge.
5. Place the AEC detector in the position closest to the chest wall. Make an exposure,
develop the film, then measure the OD.
6. On CAL SCREEN 2, select HTC FACTOR and adjust as necessary to set OD to match the
OD reading from the 26 kV, low attenuation exposure on Table 4-6 (+0.05 OD). Record
final results on Table 4-10.
Table 4-10: HTC Factor Worksheet
HTC FACTOR
Reduced
kV Thickness mAs OD HTC Factor
mA
26 30
P/N 9-500-0255 4-31

Service Manual
5.17 Large Bucky (24 x 30 cm) Factor Calibration

3. Place 4.0 cm of BR-12 or PMMA acrylic on the 18 x 24 cm Bucky, centered laterally
over the AEC detectors. Lower the compression device onto the BEM.
4. Make an exposure, develop the film, then measure the OD. Write the mA and OD in the
place provided on the Large Bucky Factor Worksheet (Table 4-11) for the 18 x 24 cm
Bucky.
5. Remove the 18 x 24 cm Bucky.
6. Place a 24 x 30 cm Bucky on the system and set the system for an Auto-Time exposure at
26 kV, Large focus, Mo filter. Set the Film field to the screen-film combination loaded in
the cassette.
7. Place 4.0 cm of BR-12 or PMMA acrylic on the 24 x 30 cm Bucky, centered laterally
over the AEC detectors. Lower the compression device onto the BEM.
8. Make an exposure, develop the film, then measure the OD. Write the mA and OD in the
place provided on the Large Bucky Factor Worksheet (Table 4-11) for the 24 x 30 cm
Bucky.
9. Divide the 18 x 24 cm Bucky mAs by the 24 x 30 cm Bucky mAs (as shown in Table 4-
11). This is the Large Bucky Factor.
10. On CAL SCREEN 2, select LgBky FACTOR and adjust as necessary to match the
calculated Large Bucky Factor.
11. Make an exposure with the 24 x 30 cm Bucky and develop the film. Measure the OD.
Adjust the Large Bucky Factor until the large Bucky OD is within 0.10 of the small Bucky
OD.
Table 4-11: Large Bucky Factor Worksheet
18 x 24 cm Bucky 24 x 30 cm Bucky
Thickness mAs OD Thickness mAs OD
4.0 cm 4.0 cm
Final Large Bucky Factor _________
4-32 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5.18 Compression Thickness Threshold Adjustment
Note… For this adjustment the system must be in 100 mA mode. Ensure that the
Compression Thickness Threshold is 1.0 cm at the start of this procedure.
1. Set the system to CAL SCREEN 3, and set the HTC C-THK threshold for 1.0 cm.
2. Install the 18 x 24 cm HTC Bucky onto the IRSD and insert a loaded cassette. Always use
the same cassette and Bucky for all calibration steps.
4. Place the amount of BR-12 or PMMA acrylic that was used in the final 25 kV, low
attenuation exposure from Table 4-6 on the Bucky, centered laterally and extending 1.0
cm over the chest wall edge. Use motorized compression to lower the compression
paddle onto the BEM material.
5. Insert a loaded cassette into the Bucky, then make a 25 kV Auto-Time exposure. Record
the mAs value (as point “A”) on the semi log worksheet (Table 4-12).
6. Release compression and place the amount of BR-12 or PMMA acrylic that was used in
the final 25 kV, high attenuation exposure from Table 4-6 on the Bucky. Reapply
compression, then make a second exposure. Record this mAs value (as point “B”) on the
semi log worksheet.
7. Draw a line between points “A” and “B” on the semi log. Follow the left side of the graph
and locate the 80 mAs point. Draw a straight line and intercept the line between the 2
points.
8. Draw a vertical line from that point to the bottom of the graph and note the compression
thickness value indicated. This is the compression thickness threshold value.
9. On CAL SCREEN 3, highlight HTC C-THK and change the displayed value to the value
calculated on the graph.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-33

Service Manual
Table 4-12: Compression Thickness Threshold Semi-Log
500
400
300
200
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
mAs↑ 10
Thickness→ 0 1cm 2cm 3cm 4cm 5cm 6cm
4-34 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5.19 C-arm Safety Function Test

The C-arm Safety Function Test procedures should be performed on a semi-annual basis or
whenever the C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board or Load Cell has been replaced.
1. Set C-arm at 0°. Place an obstruction (padded chair, table) below C-arm.
2. Press and hold C-arm down button until C-arm moves onto obstruction.
3. Verify C-arm stops automatically. If not, perform the C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board
Calibration procedures as described in Section 8.4, p. 4-63.
4. Verify that all C-arm down buttons are disabled.
5. Verify “Safety Switch” alert appears on the display. (Alert Code 6, see Chapter 5, Section
3.2, Table 5-2.)
6. Press C-arm Up button and verify C-arm moves upward.
7. Press Reset on Control Panel to clear message. Remove obstruction from C-arm area.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-35

Service Manual
Performance Tests
6.0 Performance Tests

This section of the manual contains the performance tests which verify system performance
and compliance, including verification of the X-ray generating system, and tests for X-ray
leakage.
After servicing the X-ray System, the following tests must be completed.
• Half-Value Layer (Section 6.1)
• Reproducibility and Linearity in Manual Mode (Section 6.2, p. 4-39)
• Reproducibility in Auto-Time Mode (Section 6.3, p. 4-40)
• Reproducibility in Auto kV Mode (Section 6.4, p. 4-41)
• Reproducibility in Auto-Filter Mode (Section 6.5, p. 4-41)
The following are standard system performance tests.
• Bucky Device Performance (Section 6.6, p. 4-44)
• AEC Limits Performance Test (Section 6.7, p. 4-45)
• System Level Functional Test (Section 6.8, p. 4-45)
• Optical Density (User’s Preference) Verification (Section 6.9, p. 4-45)
The following tests verify that the mammography system’s shielding meets requirements.
Perform the appropriate test(s) after servicing the Tubehead or the Image Receptor Support
Device.
• Leakage Test - IRSD (Section 6.10, p. 4-46)
• Leakage Test - Tubehead (Section 6.11, p. 4-47)
6.1 Half-Value Layer

This compliance test verifies the quality of the X-ray beam and ensures that the half-value
layer (HVL) meets the requirements set forth by the FDA, 21CFR, and the recommendations
by the ACR/CDC.
Required equipment:
• Dosimeter
• Type 1100 aluminum filter pack (99.9% pure)
• Radiation Meter and Probe
1. If a Bucky is installed, remove it.
2. Place a radiation probe 4.5 cm above the image receptor support device.
3. Position the probe 4.0 cm from the chest wall edge, and center it laterally with respect to
the left and right edges of the IRSD (Figure 4-11).
4. Set the meter function switch to milliroentgens.
5. Install the 18 x 24 cm compression paddle upside-down on the compression device.
6. Raise the compression device completely.
7. Ensure the radiation meter is positioned so that it can be read from behind the system’s
Operator Radiation Shield.
8. In the RUN mode, set the system for a Manual mode exposure at 30 kV, 70 mAs, Large
focal spot, Mo filter.
9. Insert the Auto-Aperture into the tubehead slot, make the exposure, and record the
milliroentgen reading on the semi-log (Table 4-13).
4-36 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Performance Tests
Figure 4-11: Half-Value Layer Setup
10. Place a 0.2 mm aluminum filter (99.9% pure aluminum) on the surface of the
compression paddle, directly beneath the X-ray tube port (Figure 4-11).
11. Using the same technique factors as in Step 8, make another exposure and record the
milliroentgen reading on the semi-log.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 with additional 0.1 mm sheets of aluminum between the X-ray
tube port and the radiation probe.
13. Record the milliroentgen reading on the semi-log after each exposure until the reading is
less than one-half the original step #9 exposure reading (without aluminum).
14. Draw a line on the semi-log through the plotted mR readings. It may be necessary to draw
the line to achieve a “best fit” path (in cases where the plotted readings are not linear).
15. Determine the exact half-value of the step #9 mR reading and record this on the semi-log.
16. Draw a horizontal line, starting from this plot, across the semi-log until it intersects with
the line plotted in Step 14.
17. Draw a vertical line through the intersection to the bottom of the semi-log. This is the
half-value layer.
18. Verify that the half-value layer is greater than 0.33 mm AL, and less than 0.42 mm AL
(Molybdenum filter).
19. Select the Rhodium (Rh) filter, then repeat Steps 9 through 16 to obtain the half-value
layer for the Rhodium filter. Verify that the half-value layer is greater 0.33 mm AL, and
less than 0.49 mm AL (Rhodium filter).
If the test fails, take corrective action to repair the system.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-37

Service Manual
Performance Tests
Table 4-13: Half-Value Layer Semi-Log

mR
4-38 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Performance Tests
6.2 Reproducibility and Linearity in Manual Mode

The following test verifies that the X-ray system (including the controls and X-ray tube) is
operating consistently. Record the readings and mathematical calculations in a copy of the
Reproducibility and Linearity Worksheets, Figure 4-13, p. 4-42 and Figure 4-14, p. 4-43.
1. Set the radiation probe module to read exposure in milliroentgens. Install the probe in
the fixture to set it 4.5 cm above the IRSD (as shown in Figure 4-12).
2. Position the probe 4.0 cm from the chest wall edge, and center it laterally with respect to
the left and right edges of the IRSD.
3. Turn the system on and turn on the Light Field Lamp.
4. Limit the beam to approximately the size of the probe head.
5. Reposition the probe head to center its detector in the beam.
6. Align the surface of the probe so that it stays perpendicular to the beam axis.
7. Set the system for a Manual Mode exposure at 25 kV, 60 mAs, Large Focal Spot, Mo
filter.
8. Make the exposure, then record the milliroentgen reading on the Reproducibility
Worksheet, Figure 4-13, p. 4-42.
9. Change the technique factors for both kV and mAs, then return them to 25 kV and 60
mAs.
10. Make a second exposure and record the milliroentgen reading on the Worksheet.
Figure 4-12: Reproducibility and Linearity Test Setup
11. Continue to randomly change the technique settings for kV and mAs, then return to 25
kV and 60 mAs and Make an exposure.
12. Record the milliroentgen reading on the worksheet until ten individual readings have
been recorded.
13. Compute and record the average milliroentgen reading.
14. Subtract each actual reading from the average, and square each difference. Add the
squares and divide the sum by nine. Then take the square root of the result.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-39

Service Manual
Performance Tests
15. Divide the number calculated in Step 13 by the average milliroentgen reading to obtain
the coefficient of variation. The coefficient of variation must be less than 0.05.
16. Leave the configuration on the image receptor support the same. Change the technique
settings to 25 kV and 20 mAs.
17. Make an exposure and record the milliroentgen reading and the mAs value on the
screen on the Linearity Worksheet Figure 4-14, p. 4-43.
18. Repeat Step 16, changing the mAs to 60, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, and 500.
Record milliroentgens and mAs at each setting.
19. Divide each milliroentgen reading by its corresponding mAs value.
20. For each pair of successive tests, calculate the difference between each corresponding
Step 19 result.
21. For each pair of successive tests, calculate the sum of each Step 19 result.
22. Divide each Step 20 difference value by each Step 21 sum value. If the result for any pair
exceeds 0.10, the test is considered failed.
23. Repeat Steps 16 through 22 using the Small Focal Spot.
24. If the system fails any part of the above test, first redo all calculations, then repeat the
tests. Failure to meet these performance standards indicates the need to verify the X-ray
tube’s kV, mA, and mR outputs.
6.3 Reproducibility in Auto-Time Mode

The following test verifies that the AEC system is operating consistently in the Auto-time
exposure mode. Record the readings and mathematical calculations on a second copy of the
Reproducibility Worksheet, Figure 4-13, p. 4-42.
1. On the IRSD, place 4.0 cm of acrylic attenuation on an empty cassette. Position a 10-
square cm radiation probe on top of the acrylic.
2. Center the probe position directly above the AEC sensor. Use the Light Field Lamp to
visualize the X-ray field and collimate appropriately so that just the probe is exposed.
3. Set the system for an Auto-time exposure at 25 kV, Mo Filter, Large Focal Spot. Make ten
exposures. Record the milliroentgen and post-exposure mAs readings for each exposure.
4. Calculate the average mR reading and subtract each actual reading from the average.
Square each difference. Add the squares and divide their sum by 9. Take the square root
of the result.
5. Divide the number obtained in Step 4 by the average milliroentgen reading. The quotient
(coefficient of variation) must be less than 0.05.
6. If the coefficient of variation is greater than 0.05, refer to Section 5.0, Automatic
Exposure Control System Calibration to verify the AEC calibration.
4-40 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Performance Tests
6.4 Reproducibility in Auto-kV Mode

The following test verifies that the AEC system is operating consistently in the Auto-kV
exposure mode. Record the readings and mathematical calculations in a third copy of the
Reproducibility Worksheet, Figure 4-13, p. 4-42.
1. Set up the mammography system and radiation probe exactly as in Step 1 of the Auto-
Time Reproducibility Test (Section 6.3).
2. Set the system for an Auto-kV exposure, using the Mo Filter and the Large Focal Spot.
Make ten exposures. Record the milliroentgen and post-exposure mAs readings for each
exposure.
3. Calculate the average mR reading and subtract each actual reading from the average.
Square each difference. Add the squares and divide their sum by 9. Take the square root
of the result.
4. Divide the number obtained in Step 3 by the average milliroentgen reading. The quotient
(called the coefficient of variation) must be less than 0.05.
5. If the coefficient of variation is greater than 0.05, refer to Section 5.0, Automatic
Exposure Control System Calibration to verify the AEC calibration.
6.5 Reproducibility in Auto-Filter Mode

The following test verifies that the AEC system is reproducible in the Auto-Filter exposure
mode. Failure to meet this performance test indicates the need to verify the calibration of the
AEC system.
1. On the IRSD, place 6.0 cm of acrylic attenuation on an empty cassette. Position a
radiation probe (10 square cm) on top of the BEM.
2. Align the probe position with the AEC sensor at front center on the IRSD. Use the Light
Field Lamp and collimate the X-ray field to the approximate size of the probe.
3. Set the system for an Auto-Filter exposure using the Large focal spot. Make ten exposures
and record the milliroentgen readings for each exposure.
4. Calculate the average milliroentgen reading. Subtract each actual reading from the
average. Square each difference. Add the squares and divide their sum by 9. Take the
square root of the result.
5. Divide the number obtained in Step 3 by the average milliroentgen reading. The
quotient, called the coefficient of variation, must be less than 0.05.
Note… To calculate the coefficient of variation, use the Reproducibility Worksheet

(Figure 4-13), which sequences the steps to calculate the quotient. This figure
also provides a formula to calculate the quotient using a statistical calculator.
Note that the kV and mAs values are not set for this test.
If the test fails, take corrective action to repair the system.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-41

Service Manual
Performance Tests
Figure 4-13: Reproducibility Worksheet
4-42 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Performance Tests
Figure 4-14: Linearity Worksheet
P/N 9-500-0255 4-43

Service Manual
Performance Tests
6.6 Bucky Device Performance Test

Perform this test before utilization of a new SRL 2000 or HTC Bucky device. This procedure
requires the user to make exposures to look for grid lines (SRL 2000 Bucky) or grid patterns
(HTC Bucky) on the developed film.
Mount the 18 x 24 cm Bucky device on the IRSD. This procedure requires exposing and
developing films.
Note… Use the same Bucky device, cassette, and film type for all exposures.
1. With the C-arm to 0°, on the Run Mode screen, set the system for an Auto-Time, 25 kV
exposure, Large spot, Normal density. Turn off “AutoCompression Release.”
2. Select the Film Type being used.
3. Place a loaded cassette in the Bucky device, then place 2.0 cm of BR-12 (or PMMA
acrylic) on the Bucky device. Hold the BEM in place with the Compression Device.
4. Make an exposure. Verify a low mAs reading is obtained (nominally between 12 and 40
mAs, dependent on attenuation).
5. If the mAs reading is above or below the specified range, add BEM to increase mAs, or
remove BEM to decrease mAs.
6. Reload the Bucky (using the same cassette and film type), and make an exposure.
7. Verify that the mAs falls within the specified range. If it does, remove the cassette and
develop the film.
8. Verify the absence of grid lines (SRL 2000 Bucky) or grid patterns (HTC Bucky) in the
developed film.
9. Place 5.0 cm of BR-12 (or PMMA acrylic) on the Bucky and hold it in place with the
paddle.
10. Reload the same cassette with the same film type, then load it into the same Bucky.
11. Make an exposure using the technique factors from Step 1.
12. Verify a high mAs reading is obtained (nominally between 200 and 400 mAs, dependent
on attenuation).
13. If the mAs reading is above or below the specified range, add attenuation to increase
mAs, or remove attenuation to decrease mAs.
14. Reload the Bucky (using the same cassette and film type), and make an exposure.
15. Verify that the mAs falls within the specified range. If it does, remove the cassette and
develop the film.
16. Verify the absence of grid lines (SRL 2000 Bucky) or grid patterns (HTC Bucky) in the
developed film.
17. Repeat Steps 2 through 15, but with the C-arm rotated to -90° (grid travel in the direction
of gravitational pull).
18. Verify the absence of grid lines (SRL 2000 Bucky) or grid patterns (HTC Bucky) on the
developed film for all exposures.
19. Repeat Steps 2 through 15, but with the C-arm rotated to +90° (grid travel against the
direction of gravitational pull).
20. Verify the absence of grid lines (SRL 2000 Bucky) or grid patterns (HTC Bucky) on the
developed film for all exposures.
21. Repeat the entire procedure for all Bucky devices.
4-44 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Performance Tests
6.7 AEC Limits Performance Test

This test verifies that the system automatically terminates exposures whenever the AEC
circuitry senses that optimum film density cannot be obtained within the 5 second maximum
exposure time. To comply, the system must terminate Auto-Time exposures below 5 mAs.
1. Place a lead blocker on the IRSD so that it blocks the AEC sensors within the IRSD.
2. On the Run Mode screen, set the system for an Auto-Time exposure at 28 kV, Large focal
spot. Set the Density compensation to +5, and select the film type being used.
3. Make an exposure and verify that the post-exposure mAs value is less than 5 mAs and
the message “ERROR 21: EXP TIME” appears.
4. Verify that the system displays a caution that informs the user that the calculated
exposure exceeds the backup time. Try to make another exposure before resetting the
system and verify that X-ray generation is prevented.
5. Clear the message by pressing Reset. Repeat the test at 35 kV, Small focal spot, and verify
the same caution appears in the message area.
6. If the test fails, take corrective action to repair the system.
6.8 System Level Functional Test

This test verifies system functionality.
1. Apply power to the system. Verify the display works, and power is applied to Gantry.
Examine the Control Panel display for alert messages.
2. Set system for a short exposure (25 kV, 3 mAs, Manual Mode, Large Focal Spot). Make
an exposure.
3. If no problems are found with the exposure, return system to operations.
6.9 Optical Density (Users Preference) Verification

This procedure verifies that the system falls within the users preference for OD.
1. Remove any meter, scope, or probe from the system that was used in any procedures
prior to beginning this verification.
2. Install the Bucky with a loaded cassette.
3. Place the ACR Mammographic Phantom on the Bucky, centered laterally, and positioned
1.0 cm back from the chest wall edge.
4. Move the AEC Detectors so that they are directly under the ACR Phantom.
5. Set the system for an exposure using the default exposure mode. Make an exposure.
6. Remove the cassette and develop the film.
7. Measure the film’s OD and verify that it is at the mean OD as required by the site.
8. If the OD of the film is not within site required limits, perform the AEC Calibration
procedures as described in Section 5.0, Automatic Exposure Control System Calibration.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-45

Service Manual
Performance Tests
6.10 IRSD Leakage Test

This test is performed at the factory and is not required at installation. However, it is
necessary to perform this test after repairing or replacing the IRSD.
1. Connect a radiation scatter probe (100 square cm) to the readout/logic module of a
radiation rate meter.
2. Set the meter’s operating mode to read an exposure in milliroentgens.
3. Place the readout/logic module so that it can be viewed from behind the Operator
Radiation Shield.
4. Place a 1/16 inch thick (1.6 mm) sheet of lead with a 5 inch (12.7 cm) diameter hole in
it on the IRSD.
5. Slide this lead sheet to position the hole at the position marked “A” (Figure 4-15).
Collimate the X-ray field to the 18 x 24 cm field size.
6. Position the probe beneath the image receptor support relative to the center of the hole
in the lead sheet.
7. Raise or lower the support stand until the probe is exactly 5 cm below the bottom of the
IRSD. Face the probe’s detector surface toward the X-ray source.
8. Turn on the system if necessary. On the Run Mode screen, set the system for a Manual
mode exposure at 39 kV, 220 mAs, Large focal spot. Make an exposure and record the
mR reading. If the reading is greater than 0.10 mR, take corrective action to repair the
system.
G
C
E
D
A
H
B
5c
F
SCATTER
PROBE
Figure 4-15: IRSD Shielding Test
9. Repeat this entire procedure for positions “B,” “C,” and “D” in Figure 4-15.
10. Install the 24 x 30 cm Bucky (if used). Repeat this test for positions “E”, “F”, “G” and “H”
(Figure 4-15) for the 24 x 30 cm Bucky.
11. If there are any readings greater than 0.10 mR, take corrective action to repair the
system.
4-46 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Performance Tests
6.11 X-ray Tubehead Leakage Test

This test is performed at the factory and is not required at installation. However, it is
necessary to perform this test after repair or replacement of the tubehead housing or the
lower tubehead cover.
1. Connect a radiation scatter probe (100 square cm) to the readout/logic module of a
radiation rate meter.
2. Set the meter’s operating mode to read in milliroentgens per hour (mR/Hour). Place the
readout/logic module so that it can be viewed from behind the Operator Radiation
Shield.
3. Use fixtures to hold the probe in position with relation to the tubehead as shown in
Figure 4-16. Position the probe at location “A”. Make sure the distance between the
probe and the focal spot (source) is exactly 1 meter (39 3/8 inches).
4. Apply power, then set the system for a Manual mode exposure at 39 kV, 220 mAs, Large
focal spot. Make an exposure and make a note of the mR reading.
5. Make exposures, using the same technique factors, for positions “B” through “H” (Figure
4-16). Record each mR reading. For position “H”, rotate the C-arm to position the probe
directly behind the tubehead. Be sure the distance between the probe and the focal spot
remains exactly one meter for each measurement position.
BS
NEWTONS/L
CM
Figure 4-16: Tubehead Shielding Test
Note… Any reading above 100.0 mR/Hour is unacceptable. Take corrective action
to repair the system.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-47

Service Manual
X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment Procedures
7.0 X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment Procedures

The following tests and adjustments are used to ensure that the alignment of the X-ray field
and light field are within the specifications set forth by the FDA, 21CFR, and the
recommendations by the ACR/CDC.
X-ray field alignment is the adjustment of the built-in and fixed apertures so that the X-ray
field is collimated within specified limits. The light field is adjusted to be congruent with the
X-ray field within 2% of SID.
X-ray field adjustments are performed in two stages: coarse adjustment (using a light-emitting
X-ray screen) and fine adjustment (using X-ray films). The coarse adjustment procedures
employ an X-ray Beam Alignment Template that is to be used with a separate 14 x 17 cm X-
ray cassette screen.
Required Equipment
• X-ray Beam Alignment Template
• 14 x 17 cm X-ray cassette screen
7.1 X-ray Beam Alignment Template

The translucent X-ray Beam Alignment Template (P/N 3-405-8010), shown in Figure 4-17
must be positioned on the system’s image receptor support on top of a 14 x 17 cm cassette
screen (Lanex Med). The visible borders of the X-ray field can be compared with graduations
on the template to determine coarse X-ray field alignment.
The template contains minimum and maximum borders for the left, right, and rear field
edges of the 18 x 24 cm format and the 24 x 30 cm format. For the chest wall edge, a
maximum limit (6.5 mm) is provided to adjust for chest wall edge overlap.
Figure 4-17: X-ray Beam Alignment Template
4-48 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Always position the X-ray Beam Alignment Template accurately on the image receptor
support by performing the following:.
1. Place the screen (facing up) onto the IRSD and center it.
2. Move the screen forward (away from the C-arm) approximately 1.5". Lay the template on
top of the screen.
3. Butt the rear edge of the template against the C-arm to place the image receptor tray
edge line directly above the edge of the IRSD.
4. Center the template left-to-right until the cut in edges (at the rear of the template) are set
flush with the sides of the image receptor support.
7.2 Exposing and Viewing the X-ray Field

The glow emitted from the screen must be observed from behind the protective Operator
Radiation Shield (or its equivalent). The glow is fairly dim under normal lighting conditions,
so darken the room to achieve the best possible results. Higher kV settings result in a brighter
glow, however, care must be taken to prevent overheating the X-ray tube during the repetitive
exposures that are usually necessary during the alignment procedure.
Caution: Prolonged, repeated exposures at high kV or mAs settings may cause

permanent damage to the X-ray tube. Use caution not to exceed the
thermal capacity of the tube during this procedure.
Since it is necessary to make repetitive exposures, the system can be set so that there is only
a fifteen-second Standby interval between exposures. On the Host Microprocessor Board, set
DIP Switch S2 switch 1 to On. Remember to set this switch to Off at the end of this
procedure.
The recommended method for making exposures and determining required adjustments
during this procedure:
1. Make one exposure per edge (for example, concentrate only on evaluating one edge
each time an exposure is made).
2. Use short exposure durations (one to two seconds).
3. Remember the direction of movement for that edge, and the approximate distance
required for the movement each time an exposure is made.
Keep in mind, attempting to remember the directions and amounts for more than one edge at
a time requires longer exposures, and usually, the same number of exposures as would be
necessary when doing one edge at a time.
7.3 Aperture Adjustment Procedures

Set up the system for performing the aperture adjustments:
1. Remove the Tubehead covers as described in Chapter 6, Section 3.2.1, Tubehead
Covers, p. 6-39, if not previously removed during service procedures.
2. Install the X-ray Field Alignment Template as described in Section 7.1.
3. If necessary, turn on the mammography system.
Note… Not all apertures are standard equipment on the Affinity. Perform the
sections applicable to the apertures packaged with the system.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-49

Service Manual
4. Adjust the Affinity apertures (shown in Figure 4-19) in the order shown below:
• Section 7.4, Auto-Aperture Alignment, p. 4-52
• Section 7.5, Magnification Full Field (18 x 24 cm) Aperture Alignment (SM FS), p. 4-54
• Section 7.6, 10 cm Coned-down Contact Aperture Alignment (LG FS), p. 4-55
• Section 7.7, 7.5 cm Spot Contact Aperture Alignment (LG FS), p. 4-55
• Section 7.8, 7.5 cm Spot Magnification Aperture Alignment (SM FS), p. 4-55
Figure 4-18: Aperture Alignment

1. Top Plate
2. Left/Back Alignment Blade
3. Right/Front Alignment Blade
4. Base Plate
4-50 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
4 5
Figure 4-19: Affinity Apertures

1. Auto-Aperture (Large Focal Spot)
2. 7.5 cm Spot Contact (Large Focal Spot)
3. 10 cm Coned-down Contact (Large Focal Spot)
4. 7.5 cm Spot Magnification (Small Focal Spot)
5. Mag Full Field (Small Focal Spot)
P/N 9-500-0255 4-51

Service Manual
7.4 Auto-Aperture Alignment

The Auto-Aperture (Figure 4-19 #1) is used for 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm Large Focal Spot
exposures and is aligned as follows:
7.4.1 Align the 24 x 30 cm Large Focal Spot
Note… The Auto-Aperture must be retracted for this procedure by placing a 24 x 30

cm Cassette Sensor Simulator on the breast tray. (Use the Image Receptor
Phantom Tool, PN 9-060-0403 or, if not available, strips of reflective tape
can be used.)
1. Remove the four outer screws securing the top plate of the Auto-Aperture
(Figure 4-18, #1).
2. Remove the top plate and left/back alignment blade (Figure 4-18, #2).
3. Slightly loosen the two inner screws securing the lower right/front alignment
blade (Figure 4-18, #3) to the base plate (Figure 4-18, #4) of the aperture.
Loosen just enough so that minimal effort is required to move the blade.
4. Slide the Auto-Aperture into the tubehead slot.
5. Set the exposure techniques for Large focal spot, Manual, 25 kV and 100 mAs.
6. Making exposures as necessary, adjust the right and front edges of the blade to
align within the markings on the alignment template (Figure 4-17).
7. Tighten the two inner screws, securing the right and front edges to the aperture
base plate.
8. Remove the Auto-Aperture from the tubehead slot.
9. Replace the top plate and left/back alignment blade. Leave the screws loose
enough so minimal effort is required to move the blade.
11. Making exposures as necessary, adjust the left and rear edges of the blade to
align within the markings on the alignment template.
12. Tighten the four outer screws, securing both shields to the upper and lower
aperture plates.
13. Verify the beam position again to ensure the blades did not move when
tightening the hardware.
4-52 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
7.4.2 Align the 18 x 24 cm Large Focal Spot

2. Remove the 24 x 30 cm Cassette Sensor Simulator from the breast tray and
install blockers in the aperture sensor (Figure 4-20, #2) for large focal spot.
Note… A blocker is anything that can be inserted into the aperture sensor (for
example, cotton swabs, wadded paper) that make the sensor think an
aperture is installed.
3. Make an exposure and note the location of the edges of the X-ray beam relative
to the 18 x 24 cm markings on the alignment template.
4. If the edges of the beam are not aligned properly, adjust the Auto-Aperture as
follows:
a. Slightly loosen the four screws (Figure 4-20, #1) securing the Auto-Aperture
adjustment blades just enough so that minimal effort is required to move the
blades.
b. Making exposures as necessary, adjusting the rear blade so that it is parallel
to the rear edge markings on the alignment template.
Caution: Never backdrive any axis (manually turning worm gear (Figure 4-20, #3)
on the Auto-Aperture motor) because it will destroy the gearhead. Always
use the motor control (SW1 on Tubehead Control Board) to move around
each axis.
Figure 4-20: Auto-Aperture Alignment—18 x 24 cm Large Focal Spot

1. Auto-Aperture Adjustment Blades Screws (4)
2. Aperture Sensor
3. Worm Gear—Auto-Aperture Motor Axis
P/N 9-500-0255 4-53

Service Manual
c. If the back edge field adjustment is off, reposition by relocating the Auto-
Aperture sensor to match the new location of the rear edge of the aperture.
d. Cycle the IN/OUT position of the Auto-Aperture by using SW1 on the
Tubehead Control Board, make exposures and verify position.
e. Making exposures as necessary, adjust the right blade to align within the
markings on the alignment template.
f. Tighten the two screws securing the blade.
g. Making exposures as necessary, adjust the left blade to align within the
markings on the alignment template.
h. Tighten all screws (including the sensor screw).
i. Re-verify the beam position to ensure that the blades did not move when
tightening the hardware.
7.5 Magnification Full Field (18 x 24 cm) Aperture Alignment (SM FS)
Note… The Auto-Aperture must be retracted for this procedure by placing a 24 x 30

cm Cassette Sensor Simulator on the breast tray. (Use the Image Receptor
Phantom Tool, PN 9-060-0403 or, if not available, strips of reflective tape
can be used.)
1. Remove the four outer screws securing the top plate of the Auto-Aperture (Figure 4-18,
#1).
2. Remove the top plate and left/back alignment blade (Figure 4-18, #2).
3. Slightly loosen the two inner screws securing the lower right/front blade (Figure 4-18,
#3) to the base plate (Figure 4-18, #4) of the aperture, just enough so that minimal effort
is required to move the blade.
4. Insert the aperture into the tubehead slot.
5. Set the exposure techniques for Small focal spot, Manual, 25 kV, and 100 mAs.
6. Making exposures as necessary, adjust the right and front edges of the blade to align
within the markings on the alignment template.
7. Tighten the two inner screws, securing the lower shield to the aperture base plate.
9. Replace the top plate and left alignment blade. Leave the screws loose enough so
minimal effort is required to move the blade.
11. Make exposures as necessary to adjust the left and rear edges of the blade to align within
the markings on the alignment template.
12. Tighten the four outer screws, securing both shields to the upper and lower aperture
plates.
13. Verify the beam position again to ensure that the blades did not move when tightening
the hardware.
4-54 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
7.6 10 cm Coned-down Contact Aperture Alignment (LG FS)

1. Loosen the screws securing the fixed aperture.
2. Insert the 10 cm Coned-down Contact Aperture (Figure 4-19, #3) into the tubehead slot.
3. Set the exposure techniques Large focal spot, Manual, 25 kV and 100 mAs.
4. Make an exposure.
5. Adjust the front edge of the fixed aperture so the X-ray field aligns with the markings on
the alignment template and center the image side-to-side.
6. Tighten the four outer screws, securing the upper and lower aperture plates.
the hardware.
7.7 7.5 cm Spot Contact Aperture Alignment (LG FS)

1. Loosen the screws securing the fixed aperture. Insert the 7.5 cm Spot Contact Aperture
(Figure 4-19, #2) into the tubehead slot.
2. Set the exposure techniques Large focal spot, Manual, 25 kV and 100 mAs.
3. Make an exposure. Adjust the front edge of the fixed aperture so the X-ray field aligns
with the markings on the alignment template and center the image side-to-side.
the hardware.
7.8 7.5 cm Spot Magnification Aperture Alignment (SM FS)

1. Loosen the screws securing the fixed aperture. Insert the 7.5 cm Spot Magnification
Aperture (Figure 4-19, #4) into the tubehead slot.
2. Set the exposure techniques Small focal spot, Manual, 25 kV and 100 mAs.
3. Make an exposure. Adjust the front edge of the fixed aperture so the X-ray field aligns
with the markings on the alignment template and center the image side-to-side.
the hardware.
6. Remove the alignment template when completed.
7.9 X-ray Field Alignment Verification

1. Install the X-ray Beam Alignment Template as described in Section 7.1.
2. For each aperture (see Figure 4-19), make an exposure at, 22 kV, 16 mAs, and the
applicable focal spot.
3. Develop the film.
4. For the Auto-Aperture, examine the film on the left, right, and rear edges for white space
(range: 1.0 - 3.0 mm).
5. If the white space on the left, right, or rear edges do not meet these specifications, re-
adjust the Auto-Aperture.
6. For all other apertures, make sure the exposure is centered.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-55

Service Manual
7.10 Light Field Alignment Test and Adjustment

Remove the tubehead enclosures to access the Light Field Lamp and Bracket (refer to
Chapter 6, Section 3.0, C-Arm Components—Remove and Replace, p. 6-28). When making
light field adjustments, see Figure 4-21.
7.10.1 Large Focal Spot
1. Install the Auto-Aperture (see Figure 4-19) into the tubehead slot.
2. Install the X-ray Beam alignment template.
3. Select the Large focal spot, then adjust the lamp so that the light field is congruent
with the X-ray field (the light field edges fall within 24 x 30 cm markings on
template).
Figure 4-21: Light Field Size Adjustment

1. Longitudinal Adjustment
2. Lateral Adjustment
3. Overall Adjustment
a. Longitudinal Position: alignment of front and rear edges. Loosen the screws
(Figure 4-21, #1) and rotate the lamp clockwise to move the Light Field area
forward (towards the patient); rotate it counterclockwise to move the Light
Field area toward the C-arm.
b. Lateral Position: alignment of left and right edges - Loosen the screws (Figure
4-21, #2) and move the lamp toward the left to move the light field to the
right; move the lamp toward the right to move the light field to the left.
c. Overall Size: overall area of pattern (combined length and width) - loosen
the screws securing the bracket to the C-arm frame (Figure 4-21, #3) and
move the entire bracket forward (toward patient) to expand the Light Field
area; move it back to contract the Light Field area.
4-56 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
4. Remove the template and screen, then install a loaded 24 x 30 cm cassette in a

Bucky device and mount it onto the IRSD.
5. Press the Light field button to project the lighted area onto the Bucky.
6. Accurately mark the edges of the light field on the Bucky surface using the
Alignment Bars (PN 9-060-0173).
7. Mark the front edge with a paper clip for orientation.
8. Set the system for a Manual mode exposure at 22 kV, 48 mAs, Large focal spot.
9. Step behind the Operator Radiation Shield, and make an exposure. Remove the
cassette and develop the film.
10. Compare the edges of the image area with the white marks made by the pieces
of wire or solder. The total mis-alignment of the edges of the light field with
respect to the exposure field, (along either the length or the width) shall not
exceed 2% of SID (1.3 cm).
Note… Inability to accurately align the Light Field with the X-ray image area may
indicate aperture plate mis-alignment.
7.10.2 Small Focal Spot

1. Remove the Auto-Aperture and the Bucky device. Install the 18 x 24 cm Small
Focal Spot Aperture (see Figure 4-19), then position the X-ray Beam alignment
template (Figure 4-17) on the IRSD.
2. Select the Small focal spot, then press the Light Field Lamp Button.
3. Compare the edges of the light field (18 x 24 cm Small Spot) to the markings on
the template.
4. Make lamp adjustments per step 3 of previous section (a = longitudinal, b =
lateral, and c = overall) to make the light field congruent to the X-ray field.
5. Remove the template and screen, then block the outermost (left side) accessory
detector on the IRSD using reflective material (to simulate the smaller film
format).
6. Install a loaded 24 x 30 cm cassette in a Bucky device and mount it onto the
IRSD.
7. Press the Light field button to project the lighted area onto the Bucky.
8. Accurately mark the edges of the light field on the Bucky surface using the
Alignment Bars (PN 9-060-0173).
9. Mark the front edge with a paper clip for orientation.
10. Set the system for a Manual mode exposure at 22 kV, 48 mAs, Small focal spot.
Step behind the Operator Radiation Shield, then make an exposure.
11. Remove the cassette and develop the film.
12. Compare the edges of the image area with the marks made by the Alignment
Bars (PN 9-060-0173). The total misalignment of the edges of the light field with
respect to the exposure field, (along either the length or the width) shall not
exceed 2% of SID (1.3 cm).
13. Make light field size adjustments as necessary for both the large and small focal
spots, then repeat the exposures.
14. Continue the tests and adjustments until the light field is congruent with the X-
ray field for both focal spots.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-57

Service Manual
7.11 Light Field Edge Contrast Test

This test ensures the contrast of the lighted X-ray field complies to the performance standard set
forth by FDA 21CFR. Always perform this test with the ambient light reduced (darken the room).
The following equipment is required for this test:
• Light Detector Model 268P
• Light Meter (UDT Instruments, Model 351)
• Aluminum Aperture, 1.0 mm diameter (or equivalent)
• metric ruler
1. Place the probe of a light detector
on the IRSD and center it.
2. Place the aluminum aperture
directly on the probe. Position it so
that the aperture is centered on the
probe’s sensor.
3. Turn the room lights off.
4. Record the ambient light reading
as IA.
5. Place the light detector in area “A”
on the IRSD (see Figure 4-22).
6. Orient the center of the probe 3.0
mm from the edge of the defined
light field toward the center of the
field (l1).
7. Collimate the light probe so that
only a 1 square centimeter area
(near the center) is visible.
8. Press the Light Field Lamp Button
and record the inside lux value (I1).
9. Move the probe 3.0 mm from the
edge of the defined light field away
from the center of the field.
10. Reposition the aluminum aperture.
11. Press the Light Field Lamp Button.
12. Record the outside lux reading (I2).
13. Subtract both edge readings from
the ambient reading and record
each of the differences:
(IA - I1 = D1 and IA - I2 = D2).
Figure 4-22: Light Field Edge Contrast Test

14. Divide the inside difference by the outside difference and record the ratio: (D1 / D2 = R).
15. Repeat the procedure for the remaining light field edges. Place the light meter probe at
positions B, C, and D for these tests.
A contrast ratio less than 4 at any edge is cause for rejection.
4-58 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
7.12 Light Field Illuminance Test

Intensity and consistency of the Light Field are verified by performing the following
procedure. See Figure 4-23.
1. Insert the Auto-Aperture into the tubehead slot. Place a light meter probe at position “A”
(Figure 4-23) on the image receptor support with its sensor facing up.
2. Take a background light reading (Light Field lamp Off) and record the results. Take a light
reading with the Light field lamp On and record the results.
3. Convert both readings to lux values (use the conversion table on the meter, or in the
meter manual). Subtract the background lux value from the Light Field lux value. Record
the difference.
Figure 4-23: Probe Locations—Light Field Illuminance
4. Repeat this Illuminance test for positions “B,” “C,” and “D” in Figure 4-23.
5. If the difference in any quadrant is less than 160 lux, the Light Field Illuminance Test is
considered failed.
6. If necessary, remove the lower tubehead cover, then loosen the two screws that secure
the lamp socket to the lamp cradle (Figure 4-24).
7. Increase the light field illuminance by adjusting the lamp position within the cradle.
Rotate the lamp and socket at the same time until the lamp filament is parallel with the
plane of the mirror. Tighten the screws, reinstall the tubehead cover, then repeat the test.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-59

Service Manual
Figure 4-24: Adjustment—Light Field Illuminance
8. Verify that the length-to-width ratio of the light field is not altered.
9. If the test still fails, replace the lamp and repeat the entire test. When complete, perform
the light field alignment as described in Section 7.10.
4-60 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Mechanical Adjustments
8.0 Mechanical Adjustments

The following mechanical adjustments may be required after servicing the compression
system.
Note… Chapter 6, Section 2.0, Gantry Components—Remove and Replace, p. 6-2

contains directions for removing covers.
8.1 Compression Chain Tension Adjustment

Perform this procedure after servicing or replacing the Compression Motor and Brake
Assembly or the Compression Clutch and Brake Assembly.
1. Rotate C-arm to +45°.
3. Remove the Gantry’s right side panel to access the Host Microprocessor board.
4. On the Host Microprocessor
board, set the system for the
service mode (S2 switch 1 = On).
5. Remove the lower compression
device cover.
6. Remove the C-arm upper rear
cover, and the C-arm top cover.
7. Move the compression device up
completely.
8. Loosen the set screw (Figure 4-25,
#1). The set screw is loosened
from the bottom of the
compression device.
9. Loosen the two lock nuts (Figure
4-25, #2) of the chain tension
assembly, then evenly turn the
adjustment screws (Figure 4-25,
#3) to raise or lower the tension
sprocket.
10. Tighten the set screw and verify
the chain tension. From behind
the C-arm push on the
compression chain between the
upper and lower sprockets. The
compression chain deflection
(total throw) should be between
1/4" and 1/2".
Figure 4-25: Adjustment - Compression Motor Chain
12. Rotate C-arm to 0°.
Note… Do not overly force the chain to achieve the desired deflection. Chain
movement should be effortless.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-61

Service Manual
13. Press a compression down control to move the compression device down approximately
5.0 cm, then manually move it down an additional 2.0 cm. Repeat the chain tension
verification in Step 10.
14. Continue moving the compression device downward, alternating between motorized
and manual movement, until the entire compression range is verified.
15. If any chain tension adjustments are required, repeat the tension test from the beginning.
When complete, reinstall the covers removed previously.
16. Install a Bucky device, a compression paddle and 5.0 cm of BEM.
17. Use motorized compression to lower the compression paddle until it just touches the
acrylic. Use manual compression to apply 133.5 N (30 lb) of force onto the acrylic.
18. Press Reset + Comp. Release at the same time to send the compression thickness
calibration data to the microprocessor.
19. Raise the compression paddle, remove the acrylic from the receptor support, then return
the system to the user mode (S2 switch 1 = Off).
8.2 Compression Thickness Potentiometer Adjustment
1. Ensure the timing belt is mounted on lower bearing block assembly (see Figure 6-37).
2. Bring the compression device to the bottom of its travel.
3. Rotate the potentiometer in a counterclockwise direction (when viewed from the right
side of the C-Arm assembly) until it bottoms out, then make one full turn of the pot in a
clockwise direction.
4. Manually lower the
compression device until the
potentiometer is aligned with
the access hole in the left C-
arm side rail.
5. Insert a flat blade screwdriver
through the access hole in the
left C-arm side rail. Rotate the
potentiometer in a clockwise
direction until it bottoms out,
then make one half turn of the
potentiometer in a
counterclockwise direction.
6. Tighten clamp screw (Figure 4-
26, #1) on potentiometer shaft
at this time. Ensure clamp screw
is aligned with timing belt.
7. Perform the Compression
Thickness Calibration Figure 4-26: Compression Thickness Potentiometer
Procedures as described in
Section 3.2. Legend for Figure 4-26
1.Clamp Screw
2.Sprocket
3.Hex Nut
4.Potentiometer Shaft
5.Mounting Bracket
4-62 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
8.3 Compression Force Load Cell Setting

The compression force load cell is mounted in the compression device. The type of load cell
installed in the system must be selected in calibration to ensure accurate force sensing. The
load cell type is factory set and should never be changed unless the load cell is replaced.
If the load cell is replaced in the field, perform the following to select the type load cell
installed:
1. Set the system for the service mode (S2 switch 1 = ON). Access CAL SCREEN 3 after
startup. Highlight the Load Cell field using the Cursor keys.
2. Press a Change key until the type load cell installed is displayed in the field. Press Reset
+ Comp. Release at the same time to initiate the change.
3. Perform the following procedures prior to releasing the system to the user.
• Section 3.1, Compression Force Calibration
• Section 3.2, Compression Thickness Calibration
8.4 C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board Calibration/Vertical Drive Force

Load Cell Setting
The type of load cell installed in the system must be selected in calibration to ensure
accurate force sensing. The load cell type is factory set and should never be changed unless
the load cell or the C-arm Vertical Drive Actuator is replaced.
The following special equipment is required:
• Force Gauge
• StereoLoc II or equivalent weight, 35 lb
2. Remove the right Gantry cover.
3. On the C-arm Safety board, jumper TP16 (TPY) to TP17 (TPX).
4. Install the 18 x 24 cm large focus aperture, and the 18 x 24 cm compression paddle.
Remove all other C-arm accessories (image receptors, magnification accessory, etc.).
5. Turn the system on. The C-arm Safety Microprocessor is automatically set to accept
calibration data. Verify that the CAL LED (D5) on the board illuminates.
6. When startup sequence has finished, press the “Cal Set” button (S1) on the safety board
to set the initial weight of the C-arm.
7. Install the Bucky device, then press the CAL SET switch. Remove the Bucky device.
8. Install the cassette holder and Magnification Accessory, then press the CAL SET switch.
Remove the cassette holder and Magnification accessory.
9. Remove all accessories from the C-arm. Turn the system off, and remove the jumper.
10. Turn the system on. Set the C-arm rotation to 0°.
11. Place a cushioned chair under the C-arm and place a scale (bathroom type) on top of the
chair. Slowly move the C-arm down onto the scale and verify that motion stops at
approximately 154 N, +44 N (35 lb, ±10 lb) (C-arm safety error alarm sounds).
12. Raise the C-arm and then reset the Alarm Code 6 “CARM SAFETY” on the Control Panel.
13. Repeat Steps 11 and 12 with the C-arm rotated to ± 90°.
14. If the force gauge readings are not within the range specified, 154 N, +44 N (35 lb, +10
lb), there is a problem with either the C-arm Safety board or the force load cell.
Troubleshoot as necessary.
P/N 9-500-0255 4-63

Service Manual
kV Control Offset Calibration
9.0 kV Control Offset Calibration

This procedure adjusts the kV Control Signal offset to -6.00 V, and should be performed
whenever the Host Microprocessor Board or the HV Generator Assembly is replaced.
2. Remove the Gantry’s left and right side panels (to access the HV Generator Assembly
and the Host Microprocessor board).
3. On the Host Microprocessor board, set the system for the service mode (S2 switch 1 =
ON).
4. Disconnect the HV cable from the HV Generator Assembly.
5. Verify jumper J7 on the HV Control Filament PCB is installed (refer to Appendix B,
Section 6.0, p. B-12, Table B-24).
7. Access CAL SCREEN 3, and highlight the kV field.
8. On the Control Panel, press the Reset and Comp Release buttons simultaneously. The
screen updates to show the Adjust kV Offset prompt in the message area, as shown in
Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27: kV Offset Calibration—Calibration Screen #3
9. Connect a DMM to HV Control Filament board:

• Negative lead to TP41 (GND)
• Positive lead to TP48 (-VP Local)
10. On the HV Control Filament board, adjust R71 for an output of -6.00 V at TP48.
11. Disconnect the DMM.
14. Reconnect the HV Cable to the HV Generator Assembly.
15. Reinstall all covers.
4-64 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Chapter 5: Maintenance—General
Introduction
1.0 Introduction
This chapter provides general information to aid the Service Engineer in maintaining the
Affinity. The information covered in this chapter is as follows:
• Preventive Maintenance (Section 2.0)
• Troubleshooting (Section 3.0, p.5-3)
2.0 Preventive Maintenance

The recommended preventive maintenance procedures for this system are identified in Table
5-1. In addition, each time the system is down for service:
1. The system should be inspected for:
• Cleanliness,
• Loose or missing panels or covers, and
• Loose or frayed wires or cables.
2. The Alert Codes Log should be reviewed for existing fault conditions as described in
Section 3.2.
3. Correct any problems found prior to returning the system to operations.
Upon removing and replacing major components within the Affinity, any recommended
calibration or performance test procedures must be performed (as required). The
recommended frequency of performance codes used in Table 5-1 are defined as follows:
• A = Annual
• S = Semi-Annual
• M = Monthly
• W = Weekly
• D = Daily
• AR = As Required
P/N 9-500-0255 5-1

Service Manual
Preventive Maintenance
Table 5-1: Affinity Recommended Preventive Maintenance Procedures
Frequency PM Refer to
D; AR Pre-Startup Inspection Chapter 3, Section 2.1, Pre-
Startup Inspections, p. 3-2
D; AR Post Startup Tests Chapter 3, Section 2.3, Post-
Startup Tests, p. 3-3
S C-arm Safety Function Test Chapter 4, Section 5.19, C-arm
Safety Function Test, p. 4-35
AR C-arm Safety Microprocessor Chapter 4, Section 8.4, C-arm
Board Calibration Safety Microprocessor Board
Calibration/Vertical Drive Force
Load Cell Setting, p. 4-63
S Tube Voltage Calibration Chapter 4, Section 4.1, Tube
Voltage Calibration, p. 4-9
S Filament Current Calibration Chapter 4, Section 4.3, Filament
Current (mA) Calibration, p. 4-12
S Automatic Exposure Control Chapter 4, Section 5.0, Automatic
System Calibration Exposure Control System
Calibration, p. 4-19
S Compression System Calibration Chapter 4, Section 3.0,
Compression System Calibration
Procedures, p. 4-7
S X-ray System Performance Tests Chapter 4, Section 4.0, Exposure
System Calibration, p. 4-9
S System Level Performance Tests Chapter 4, Section 6.0,
Performance Tests, p. 4-36
A X-ray Field Alignment Test Chapter 4, Section 7.0, X-ray and
Light Field Test and Alignment
Procedures, p. 4-48
A Light Field Alignment Test Chapter 4, Section 7.10, Light
Field Alignment Test and
Adjustment, p. 4-56
5-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.0 Troubleshooting
This section provides an overview of system theory of operation and the system Alert Codes.
The theory of operation and Alert Codes can be used in conjunction with the Test Point and
LED Indicators Reference Tables found in Appendix B and the Affinity Schematic Package for
troubleshooting the Affinity.
3.1 Theory of Operation Overview

This section provides a top level description of system and sub-system operation within the
Affinity to aid the Service Engineer in maintaining the system. For detailed information on
signals within the Affinity Series System, refer to the Schematics Package.
The Affinity, is a multi-processor, menu-driven mammography system which consists of the
following sub-systems:
• Operator Control Panel
• Power Distribution
• System Control
• Tubehead Functions
• X-ray Tube Control
• Mechanical Functions
• Exposure Control
• Automatic Exposure Control
3.1.1 Operator Control Panel

The Operator Control Panel, is a microprocessor based system that communicates
bi-directionally with the Host Microprocessor Board via RS-422 differential I/O
(Input/Output) ports. The Control Panel may be remotely located up to 50 feet from
the Gantry. The Control Panel contains the display screen, the display Scroll and
Change keys, Reset Button, X-ray Button, Compression Release Button, and the
visual X-ray On indicator.
Two screens appear during the startup cycle to indicate the Control Panel and
Gantry configurations.
The "RUN" screen appears after the startup cycle. When all interlocks are satisfied
the message area displays "READY". At this point you can make an exposure.
There are several additional screens (User Default, Exposure Default, and four
Service screens) that are accessed by pressing the RESET and a Scroll arrow (->) key.
These screens permit the user to set power-on default settings and permit the service
engineer to access calibration settings.
The microprocessor in the Operator Control Panel is a Motorola HC-16 series with
support RAM, EPROM, and Video RAM chips. The display is a one-quarter VGA
LCD with backlight. The audible alert for X-ray indication is resident to the Host
Microprocessor Board. A connector is supplied to permit the use of an external X-
ray Button. The board is supplied with +12 VDC and is regulated down to +5 VDC
for circuit operation.
P/N 9-500-0255 5-3

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.1.2 Power Distribution

Power is derived from the incoming Mains Line voltage of 220/230 VAC nominal,
50/60 Hz, single-phase power. A line filter is utilized to reduce RFI/ENC emissions
and susceptibility to noise. The toroidal transformer isolates the incoming power
and multiple voltages are derived from the secondary windings. These voltages are
rectified and regulated, then distributed throughout the system.
There is a soft-start circuit to limit the inrush current.
The X-ray tube is air-cooled. The Host Microprocessor Board monitors the tube fan
RPM feedback signal and blocks exposures if the fan stops rotating.
There is a circuit that monitors the Emergency Off Switches. This circuit is monitored
by the Host Microprocessor Board and inhibits any exposures or motions upon
failure with the trip coil of the circuit breaker.
Relay contacts are available for external X-ray on and Power on lights.
The Mains Circuit Breaker serves as the system On/Off switch.
3.1.3 System Control

System Control consists of the following printed circuit boards (PCB):
• Host Microprocessor
• Communication Interface
• C-arm Safety
• Power Control
Host Microprocessor
The Host Microprocessor is a Motorola HC-16 series with support RAM and EPROM
chips. All system control is processed by this PCB. The RS-422 I/O port connects to
the Operator Control Panel to read the inputs and in turn supplies the appropriate
output signals to the Tube Control, High Voltage Control, and motors for system
operation. There are DIP switches located on this PCB for different system
configurations and operations.
Communications Interface
The Communications Interface PCB distributes fused low voltage to the system, as
well as being the communications interface between the Host Microprocessor and
all sub-systems.
C-arm Safety
The C-arm Safety PCB reads the output of a strain gauge mounted to the vertical
travel assembly (VTA). This output represents the external force applied to the C-arm
in the downward motion, and the circuit is calibrated to inhibit the VTA down motor
drive upon sensing approximately 35 pounds (154 Newtons) of applied pressure.
The inhibit signal is monitored by the Host Microprocessor and in turn is
communicated to the Power Control PCB to inhibit the VTA down drive.
5-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
Power Control
The Power Control PCB controls the following system functions:
• Collimator lamp power
• Compression motor drive
• Compression motor brake
• Rotation Lock release
• VTA actuator drive
All input signals come from the Host Microprocessor PCB.
3.1.4 Tubehead Functions

The tubehead micro-controller (PIC series) communicates with the Host
Microprocessor via the RS-422 I/O port. This PCB receives input to control the
collimator assembly motions (Mirror, Auto-Aperture, Lamp, and Filter movements)
and reports to the Host Microprocessor the status (position) of each movement. The
removable apertures are encoded with a 4 bit word and this information is
communicated to the Host Microprocessor. These functions are all processed by the
Host Microprocessor and must match a valid condition before you can make an
exposure may be initiated.
This PCB also supplies drive to the Filter Indicators (if equipped) located on the
external keypads.
P/N 9-500-0255 5-5

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.1.5 X-ray Tube Control

The X-ray tube control involves the filament, stator drive (boost and brake), and
high-voltage control circuitry. This system is comprised of the Tube Control PCB, the
Inverter PCB, and the high-voltage transformer and multiplier.
Filament Control
Filament power is supplied by a pulse-width-modulated (PWM) inverter supply. The
filament is operated at a stand-by current of approximately 2.5 Amps. Upon
exposure initiation, the filament is boosted to its emission level determined by the
technique selected (pre-heat) and then is transferred to closed loop servo control
during the exposure. The filament High power source is applied to the common of
relay K1 which directs the power to the selected filament (small or large). This
supply is connected to the X-ray tube low voltage connector via the Tube Protect
PCB. The filament current is sensed and used as an input element for the PWM
control.
Filament Bias
There is a negative bias voltage applied between filament common and the X-ray
tube grid. This voltage is derived from a dc-to-dc converter to two potentiometers,
one for the small and one for the large filaments, which are factory adjusted to a pre-
determined value. This bias voltage is utilized to highly reduce the off-focus
radiation and to improve the focal spot distribution characteristics.
Stator Control
The stator drive is derived using the high-voltage inverter. During the ROTOR
BOOST period, a 180 Hz signal is applied to the HV inverter and its output is
applied to the stator coil through relay K1. This stator has two windings, main and
phase, with a common return. The common return is sensed for current flow during
the boost period and after a specified period of time, reports a "Rotor Ready" signal
to the Host Microprocessor. There is now drive voltage to the stator coil during the
exposure. A 90 VDC signal is applied at the end of an exposure to "brake" the rotor
below its mechanical resonance frequency. This function resides on both the Power
Control PCB and the Inverter PCB.
High Voltage Control
The high voltage (HV) is derived using the PWM servo control in the inverter. The
output of the inverter is applied through relay K1 to the primary of the HV
transformer. The output of the transformer is rectified and multiplied in the multiplier
section and applied to the anode of the X-ray tube. There is a sensing coil at the
output of the multiplier to detect any large current spikes due to tube arcing and is
used to shut down the HV drive. There is also a HV divider within the multiplier that
returns the voltage value as a feedback signal to control the HV during the exposure.
An additional HV connector is available for external measurement of the actual HV.
An analog signal is applied to the Power Control PCB from the Host Microprocessor
which represents the kV value selected by the technique. This value becomes the
input to the PWM to control the actual output kV value. The feedback signal is fed to
the Host Microprocessor and compared with the desired value to provide servo
control during the exposure of the actual kV value.
5-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.1.6 Mechanical Functions

Compression Mechanism
The compression mechanism is comprised of a motor, clutch, and brake. Electrical
control resides on the Power Control PCB. Compression motion, up and down, is
motorized or may be manually operated. The motorized motions are activated either
by buttons located on the C-arm or by footswitches. The downward motorized force
is limited to 200 N (45 lb) and may be set to a value less than that utilizing the User
Defaults. Manual operation is designed to provide fine control of final compression.
The compression brake is used to prevent back-drive of the mechanism. There is a
function, if selected, which automatically releases the mechanism or drives it
upward at the end of an exposure. This function is inhibited upon the sensing of a
localization paddle. If power is removed while a patient is under compression, you
may manually back drive the mechanism to release the compression force to safely
remove the patient.
There is a strain gauge and a potentiometer associated with the compression
mechanism to measure pressure applied to the compression paddle and to measure
the distance compression paddle from the attached breast support (Bucky or
Magnification device) to indicated compression force and compression thickness,
respectively. The display of both force and thickness is located on the compression
mechanism. The force and thickness is transmitted via the printer or flasher port for
permanent record.
Rotation Mechanism
The rotation mechanism permits the C-arm to be rotated between +195° and -150°.
A fail-safe elector-magnetic lock is used to maintain mechanism lock in the event of
power failure. Release of the lock is by activation of buttons located on the C-arm
and is electrically controlled by the Power Control PCB.
There is a potentiometer associated with this motion to provide input for display of
the C-arm rotation angle, and to transmit this information to the printer and flasher
port for permanent record.
Vertical Travel Assembly
The vertical travel assembly (VTA) is used to move the C-arm up and down. The
motion is motor driven by an AC actuator, which is activated by buttons located on
the C-arm or footswitches, and is electrically controlled by the Power Control PCB.
There is a strain gauge located at the base of the actuator to sense the upward force
applied externally to the C-arm assembly. This strain gauge signal is processed by
the C-arm Safety PCB and inhibits downward motion upon the sensing of
approximately 154 N (35 lb).
P/N 9-500-0255 5-7

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.1.7 Exposure Control

The exposure function is controlled by the Host Microprocessor. Several inputs are
monitored and must be correct before you make an exposure. These include a valid
combination of image receptor and aperture, a rotor ready signal, and continuous
activation of the X-ray Button(s). The X-ray Button(s) must be released prior to the
initiation of subsequent exposures. There are four exposure modes available:
• Manual
• Auto-Time
• Auto-kV
• Auto-Filter
Manual
This mode provides the selection of kV, mAs, and Filter.
Auto-Time
When this mode is selected, the kV, Filter, and density are the only factors that are
selectable. The exposure is terminated at a value of mAs that is determined by the
AEC algorithm to yield an OD to which the system has been calibrated. A post-mAs
readout indicates the actual mAs value at the termination of the exposure and
remains displayed until the initiation of the next exposure. This mode is valid for use
with either the Molybdenum or Rhodium filter selected. The exposure mAs may be
modified up to ± 80% by incrementing or decrementing the DENSITY function. If
determination is made during the AEC sample period (first 50ms) that the exposure
exceeds the "Back-Up-Time", the exposure is terminated.
Auto-kV—SRL 2000 Bucky Operation
When this mode, along with the Molybdenum filter, is selected, the kV is the default
kV selected in the exposure defaults screen. The starting kV may be changed to 25
kV or 26 kV. When the Rhodium filter is selected, the kV defaults to 28 kV. Upon
exposure initiation, the AEC signal is sampled and the kV may be incremented
upward to a maximum value of 30 kV if the Molybdenum filter is selected, or 32 kV
if the Rhodium filter is selected. The exposure is terminated at a mAs value near one
of the selected mAs windows (125 mAs, 165 mAs, 200 mAs, or the AUTOmatic 200
mrad window). The final kV and post-mAs is displayed upon termination of the
exposure.
Auto-kV—HTC Bucky Operation
When this mode and the Molybdenum filter are selected, the kV defaults to a value
determined by the Compression Height Threshold setting. The kV defaults to 24 kV
for a compression height value less than the threshold, or to 25 kV for compression
height values above the threshold. When the Rhodium filter is selected, the kV
defaults to 28 kV. The exposure is terminated at a mAs value near the selected mAs
windows (125 mAs, 165 mAs, 200 mAs, or the AUTOmatic 200 mrad window),
selectable by the operator. The final kV and post mAs are displayed upon
termination of the exposure.
5-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
Auto-Filter
This mode provides full automatic operation of all technique factors. Upon exposure
initiation, the AEC signal is sampled to determine if the kV needs to be incremented
upward to provide an exposure within the 200 mAs window, or the 200 mrad
window. When determined by the AutoFILTER algorithm, the exposure is
momentarily interrupted and the Rhodium filter is moved into the beam in place of
the Molybdenum filter. After the kV or kV/filter has been selected by the algorithm,
the Auto-Time function completes the exposure. The final kV, post-mAs, and Filter
are displayed upon termination of the exposure.
3.1.8 Automatic Exposure Control

A three cell solid-state detector and pre-amplifier are located in the image receptor
support device. It is manually positioned to one of 7 positions by the technologist,
depending on the anatomy of the breast under examination. It is ideally placed
under the glandular, or most dense, area of the breast. The signal from the detector
represents the average attenuation of the area under the three cells and is sent to the
microprocessor. It is first converted into a digital signal and used as a variable in an
algorithm that predicts the time required to obtain a standard (calibrated) OD. This
signal is also used in Auto-kV and Auto-Filter modes to determine the kV and filter
(Mo or Rh) for completing the exposure within a predetermined time window.
There are two safety back-up-timers, firmware and hardware, utilized to terminate
the exposure should there be failure of system components or firmware corruption.
P/N 9-500-0255 5-9

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.2 Alert Codes Log

This section lists the alert codes that appear in the Run Mode screen when a malfunction
occurs, and other pertinent information that is useful to the service engineer. The alert codes
are recorded in Table 5-2.
To view the Alert Codes Log:
• From Calibration Screen #3, select the “Special” command field, then select “View Error
Log”.
• Press Reset + Comp Rel (use scroll keys to view the error log).
To download the Alert Codes Log onto a Laptop Computer, refer to Section 3.3, p.5-12.
Table 5-2: Affinity Series Alert Messages
No. Alert Name Alert Messages Comment

N/A ERROR_KEYBOARD STUCK KEYBOARD STUCK Alert message produced if any of the
Control Panel buttons are closed during
initial startup. Initialization is stopped until
the button is opened.
N/A XRAY FOOTSWITCH STUCK XRAY Alert message produced if the X-ray
FOOTSWITCH footswitch is closed during initial startup.
STUCK Initialization is stopped until the switch is
opened. Note: Footswitch must be enable
for this test by setting S2 switch 3 to OFF
(on Host Microprocessor Board).
1 BACKUP_TIMER CONTROL Exposure time required exceeded Backup
timer maximum.
2 CALCULATED_EXPOSURE_EXCEEDS_MAX EXP > BACKUP AEC algorithm predicts exposure will
exceed the programmed maximum
exposure mAs.
3 XRAY_SWITCH_NOT_RELEASED X-RAY SWITCH Must release X-ray Button following
exposure.
5 AEC_SIGNAL_SATURATED EXP TIME AEC circuit returned invalid signal
(saturated).
6 CARM_SAFETY_SWITCH_ERROR C-ARM SAFETY Actuator error—C-arm vertical drive safety
circuit has been activated. C-arm
movement is impeded.
8 INTERLOCK_FAULT INTERLOCK X-ray high voltage interlock (AJ13-4) was
found high during start of X-ray.
9 AEC_NO_SIGNAL_ERROR EXP < MIN TIME AEC circuit returned invalid signal (no
signal).
10 XRAY_SWITCH_FAULT XRAY SWITCH X-ray Button early release.
12 NV_RAM_ERROR NV RAM ERROR Non-volatile RAM test failed at startup.
Calibration values may have been
corrupted.
15 UNDEFINED_SYSTEM_ERROR SYSTEM ERROR System has generated an undefined error
code, the result of a programming error.
17 STORED_PARAMETER_ERROR PARAMETER The stored calibration value is out of range,
indicating possible corruption of the
calibration RAM.
20 TUBE_ROTOR_FAULT CONTROL ROTOR OK low.
21 HTC_MIN_ERROR EXP TIME Calculated exposure time is less than HTC
minimum travel time.
5-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
Table 5-2: Affinity Series Alert Messages (Continued)
No. Alert Name Alert Messages Comment

25 HV_FAULT_DETECTED CONTROL HV fault.
27 FILAMENT_SUPPLY_ERROR CONTROL Filament test in boost routine not within
12.5% of adaptive table of DAC values.
44 MA_SENSE_ERROR CONTROL mA sense >80 mV during pre-exposure or
mA sense is not within 12.5% of expected
value during exposure.
45 KV_SENSE_ERROR CONTROL kV sense (J207-3) not with 12.5%
expected value during exposure.
51 BUCKY_ERROR BUCKY Error in Bucky comm exposure attempt.
53 NO_CASSETTE_ERROR NO CASSETTE Cassette required for exposure.
54 CASSETTE_NOT_REMOVED REMOVE CASS Cassette not removed after exposure.
61 CARM_DRIVE_ERROR CARM DRIVE C-arm drive circuit reported an error.
62 CARM_SWITCH_ERROR C-ARM SWITCH C-Arm buttons active during startup.
64 CARM_SWITCH_NOT_RELEASED C-ARM SWITCH Can’t start X-ray with C-arm Button
pressed.
68 COMM_ERROR Console Communication fails between Host and
Communication Control Panel.
71 MIRROR_FAULT MIRROR Mirror detected as not moving away from
X-ray field during an X-ray exposure
attempt.
72 FILTER_ERROR FILTER Incorrect filter position.
73 TUBEHEAD_COMM_ERROR SYSTEM ERROR Host board is unable to communicate with
Tubehead Controller during bootup.
74 COLLIMATOR_LAMP_ERROR LAMP Lamp in wrong position for exposure.
75 AUTO_APERATURE_ERROR APERATURE Unable to change Auto-Aperture (3 sec.
time out).
76 FIXED_APERTURE_ERROR NO APERTURE No aperture.
77 INCORRECT_APERTURE WRONG Incorrect aperture.
APERTURE
78 TUBEFAN_STATUS_ERROR TUBE FAN Tube Fan status hardware reports an error.
79 TUBEHEAD_STATUS_ERROR TUBE HEAD Tubehead Controller returns a bad or
incorrect status.
80 COMPFORCE_COMM_ERROR SYSTEM ERROR Host board is unable to communicate with
Compression Paddle Controller.
84 TUBEHEAD_COMM_ERROR SYSTEM ERROR Host board is unable to communicate with
Tubehead Controller.
85 BOOST_TUBEHEAD_COMM_ERROR SYSTEM ERROR During boost, Host board is unable to
communicate with Tubehead Controller.
86 AF_EXPOSURE_TUBEHEAD_COMM_ERROR SYSTEM ERROR During Auto-Filter Exposure, Host board is
unable to communicate with Tubehead
Controller.
90 FLASHER_COMM_ERROR AUTO ID Flasher does not respond.
92 PRINTER_NO_PAPER_ERROR PRINT NO PAPER
93 PRINTER_OFF_LINE_ERROR PRINT OFF LINE
95 INTERLOCK_STATUS_ERROR INTERLOCKS Interlock circuit hardware reports an error.
P/N 9-500-0255 5-11

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.3 System Data Retrieval

The Affinity System provides the Service Engineer with the capability to download/upload
calibration data and the Alert Codes Log to a laptop computer with a Terminal Emulation
Program (such as HyperTerm). This allows the Service Engineer to print or append this data
as needed.
In order download this information, a Null-Modem, 9 pin to 25 pin Adapter, approximately
6 feet, is required.
Table 5-3: Null-Modem, 9-pin to 25-pin Adapter Connections
9-pin, Female, DB-9 25-pin, Male, DB-25

Signal From To Signal
RX Data 2 2 TX Data
TX Data 3 3 RX Data
S-Ground 5 7 S-Ground
CTS 7 5 CTS
RTS 8 4 RTS
1. Connect the laptop computer to the Affinity System using the Null-Modem Cable as
shown in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1: Connecting Laptop Computer to Affinity
2. Setup the laptop to receive and record a data file as follows:

• 9600 baud
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
• no parity
• no flow control.
3. To download Alert Codes Log, go to Section 3.3.1. To download/upload calibration data,
go to Section 3.3.2.
5-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.3.1 Downloading Alert Codes Log

1. At the Affinity Control Panel, Calibration Screen #3, select the “Special”
command field, then select “View Error Log”.
Note… Care must be taken to avoid selection of INIT CAL DATA option in the
Special command field. When selected and initiated, this field resets all
calibration data.
2. Press Reset + Comp Rel to access the Alert Codes Log.
3. The title of the log, # of records, and CMD line appear on the display screen,
along with the first page of alert codes. Use scroll keys to view the log.
4. Select (using the change keys) the DOWNLOAD command.
5. Press Reset + Comp Rel to initiate data transfer.
6. Select (using the change keys) the CLEAR command.
7. Press Reset + Comp Rel to clear the log.
8. Verify the log is empty.
9. From the computer, the log can now be printed or appended.
3.3.2 Downloading Calibration Data

command field, then select DOWNLOAD CAL.
Note… Care must be taken to avoid selection of INIT CAL DATA option in the
Special command field. When selected and initiated, this field resets all
calibration data.
2. Set up Hyperterm to display downloading data and select Capture Text from the
Transfer Menu. Type in an appropriate path and set the file name to any VALID
FILE NAME.TXT, include system identification (for example, DOWN1.TXT).
3. Press Reset + Comp Rel to automatically download the calibration data to the
laptop.
4. When complete, the message area on the display screen shows DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE. On the HyperTerm, select Transfer - Capture Data - Stop. Verify
that the data downloaded correctly by examining the text file established in Step
2.
5. From the computer, the log can now be printed or appended.
P/N 9-500-0255 5-13

Service Manual
Troubleshooting
3.3.3 Uploading Calibration Data

1. On the HyperTerm’s File-Properties-Settings-Ascii Setup menu, configure the
HyperTerm for 300 ms line delay and 1 ms character delay.
command field, then select UPLOAD CALIB.
3. Press Reset + Comp Rel and verify that the Status prompt is “START UPLOAD”.
4. On HyperTerm, select Transfer - Send Text File and provide the path and file
name for the file previously downloaded (see Section 3.3.2) and select OPEN to
start the upload.
5. When “UPLOAD COMPLETE” appears on the status line, reboot the Affinity
and verify that all calibration and configuration data has bee restored.
5-14 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Chapter 6: Maintenance—Remove and Replace Procedures
Introduction
Chapter 6: Maintenance—Remove and Replace

Procedures
1.0 Introduction
This chapter details the remove and replace procedures for the Affinity. Where necessary,
references are given for performing required alignment and/or adjustment procedures.
• Section 2.0 provides the remove and replace procedures for the components within the
Gantry.
• Section 3.0 provides the remove and replace procedures for the components within the
C-arm Assembly.
Only authorized, trained service engineers can service this mammography system. The
system is designed for module-level repair. When a defective module (assembly) is
identified, the service engineer replaces it with a new one.
Warning: Service engineers must take appropriate radiation safety measures

when testing (or maintaining) the system.

Note… When servicing the Affinity, if a procedure instructs you to remove any
covers or panels, do not reinstall the covers until all required procedures
(for example, calibrations, adjustments, tests, remove and replace, etc.) are
completed.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-1

Service Manual
Gantry Components—Remove and Replace
2.0 Gantry Components—Remove and Replace

This section provides procedures for performing the following:
• Removing covers and panels from the Gantry, Section 2.1
• Servicing the Gantry cover components, Section 2.2
• Servicing the Control Panel components, Section 2.3
• Servicing the left-side Gantry components, Section 2.4
• Servicing right-side Gantry components, Section 2.5
• Servicing internal Gantry components, Section 2.6
See Figure 6-1 for identification of the Affinity Series Gantry Components.
6
2
1
7 12
2
13
3
8
9 14
4
10
5
11
Figure 6-1: Gantry Components
1. Host Microprocessor Board 9. Main Circuit Breaker

2. Emergency Off Switch (3) 10. C-arm Actuator Assembly
3. Communications Interface Board 11. Force Load Cell—Vertical Drive
4. Low Voltage Power Supply 12. High Voltage Generator Assembly
5. C-arm Safety Board 13. C-arm Rotation Potentiometer
6. C-arm Angle Display Board (2) 14. Power Control Board
7. Operator Control Panel (Control System Assy) 15. Auxiliary Power Distribution Board
8. C-arm Angle Detent Microswitch
6-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.1 Removing Covers and Panels From the Gantry

The maintenance instructions in this chapter require cover or panel removal to gain access to
the interior of the system. Refer to this section for all Gantry cover removal procedures. Be
sure to turn off the system before removing the covers.
STOP
Figure 6-2: Gantry Components—Covers and Panels

1. Right-side Cover
2. Left-side Cover
3. Upper Rear Panel
4. Rear Connector Panel (with Shroud installed)
5. Lower Rear Panel/Power Distribution Assembly
P/N 9-500-0255 6-3

Service Manual
2.1.1 Left and Right Side Panels

Removal of the Gantry’s left and right side panels (Figure 6-2, Items 1 and 2) provide
access to the system’s high voltage electronics, power distribution, and
microprocessor assemblies. Both cover removal procedures are identical except
when the Operator Radiation Shield is installed. The Operator Radiation Shield must
be removed before removing the right-side Gantry cover. If an Operator Radiation
Shield is not installed, perform steps 1 and 4 through 8. If an Operator Radiation
Shield is installed, perform Steps 1 and 4 through 8 for the left side covers. Perform
all steps for the right side covers.
2. Remove the hardware securing the Operator Radiation Shield lower bracket to
the bottom of the Gantry.
3. Remove the hardware securing the Gantry upper bracket to the top of the
Operator Radiation Shield. Remove the Operator Radiation Shield and set it in a
secure location.
4. Remove the hardware securing the top of side cover.
5. Slide the cover upward until the tabs on the cover clear the mounting slots in
the Gantry frame.
Caution: In step 6, be careful that you do not disconnect any connectors when
pulling the cover away from the system.
6. Pull the cover slightly away from the system, then set it upright on the floor.
Note that a wiring harness connected to the Angle Display Board and the
Emergency Off Switch is still attached to the Gantry. Proceed to Step 8 if the side
panel is to be replaced.
7. Do not perform steps 8 and 9 if the system is to be turned on at any point while
servicing the system. The system does not function if the cables/side panels are
disconnected.
8. Turn the cover away from the system to gain access to the wiring harness.
Follow the harness to the connector on the Gantry frame.
9. Disconnect the wiring harness, then set the cover in a secure location.
2.1.2 Upper Rear Gantry Panel

The upper rear panel (Figure 6-2, #3) on the Gantry provides access to the On/Off
Circuit Breaker, and the components on the C-arm’s Vertical Travel Assembly (VTA).
2. Loosen the eight fasteners that secure the upper rear panel to the Gantry.
3. Lift the panel up slightly, then pull it away from the system.
4. Store the panel in a safe location to prevent damage.
6-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.1.3 Rear Connector Panel

The connector panel (Figure 6-2, #4) on the lower rear side of the Gantry houses the
connectors for the Footswitches and accessories. Removal of this panel is only
necessary when replacing a connector or when removing the lower rear panel
(Figure 6-3, #3).
1. Remove the upper rear panel as described in Section 2.1.2.
2. Remove the four screws that secure the shroud (Figure 6-3, #2) to the standoffs
on the upper rear panel.
3. Remove the four screws that secure the rear connector panel (Figure 6-3, #1) to
the Gantry Frame.
4. Pull the panel away from the Gantry, then flip it down to gain access to the
connector mounting hardware.
5. Reverse these procedures to reinstall the panel.
Figure 6-3: Rear Connector and Lower Rear Panels—Removal

1. Rear Connector Panel
2. Shroud
3. Lower Rear Panel
P/N 9-500-0255 6-5

Service Manual
2.1.4 Lower Rear Panel/Power Distribution Assembly

The lower rear panel (Figure 6-3, #3) which is part of the Power Distribution
Assembly chassis, provides access to the isolation transformer and the C-arm
actuator assembly. The panel and Power Distribution Assembly chassis slide out of
the system together.
The Power Distribution Assembly chassis has an upper and lower shelf. The isolation
transformer is mounted on the lower shelf; the input power filter, Relay Protection
Board, and transformer tap panel are on the upper shelf. Before proceeding, turn the
system off.
1. Remove the upper rear, shroud, and connector panels as described in Section
2.1.2 and Section 2.1.3. See Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3.
2. Remove the six screws that secure the lower rear panel to the Gantry frame.
3. Pull the panel, which is attached to the input power assembly chassis, out of the
Gantry approximately halfway.
4. Disconnect the wiring harnesses from their receptacles. Tag each connector
with its receptacle designation.
5. Pull the chassis completely out of the Gantry.
6. Reverse these procedures to reinstall the panel.
6-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.2 Gantry Cover Components

2.2.1 C-arm Angle Display Boards
The Affinity Series has two C-arm Angle Display Boards which are mounted inside
the left and right side Gantry covers, near the top. The removal procedures for both
boards are identical.
1. Remove power to the system. Remove the left or right side Gantry cover
(whichever is appropriate).
2. Locate the connector at DJ1 on the rear of the C-arm Angle Display Board and
disconnect it.
3. Remove the two mounting screws that secure the Display Board to the cover.
Pull the board off of the spacers. Note that the two spacers between the board
and the mounting holes can be removed.
4. Position the replacement C-arm Angle Display on top of the spacers. Secure the
board and spacers with the previously removed hardware.
5. Make the wire harness connection at DJ1 on the Board. Apply power to the
system, then rotate the C-arm to the 0° position.
6. Verify that both C-arm Rotation Angle Displays read 0°.
7. Confirm that both C-arm Rotation Angle Displays show the correct C-arm
rotation angle at ±45°, ±90°, ±135°, and +180° when moved to each detent
position.
8. If the test fails, verify the C-arm Detent Microswitch adjustment (Section 2.6.2)
and the C-arm Rotation Potentiometer adjustment (Section 2.6.3).
9. When complete, turn the system off, then reinstall the previously removed
cover.
Figure 6-4: C-arm Angle Display Board—Removal
P/N 9-500-0255 6-7

Service Manual
2.2.2 Emergency Off Switches

Affinity Systems have three EMO Switches (two of which are mounted on the front of
left and right side Gantry covers with the third mounted on the rear of the right side
Gantry). For those systems with the Remote Control Panel, a fourth EMO Switch is
located on the Remote Control Panel mounting block. The removal procedures for
all EMO Switches are identical (see Figure 6-5).
2. Remove the left or right side Gantry cover (whichever is appropriate).
3. Cut the wire ties that secure the switch harness to the rear of the switch.
4. Pull the wires off of the terminals (note each terminal’s position), or (if
applicable) desolder the wires.
5. Unscrew the ring nut (#3) from the switch (#1) and remove the ring nut and lock
washer (#2).
6. Pull the switch through the cover from the front.
7. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement EMO Switch. When complete,
reinstall all previously-removed covers.
Figure 6-5: Emergency Off Switch—Removal
6-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.3 Control Panel Components

The Control Panel houses the Display Microprocessor Board and the Control Panel LCD
Display (see Figure 6-6). This section contains the procedures to remove and reinstall the
internal components of the Affinity Series Control Panel.

Figure 6-6: Control Panel Components

1. Display Microprocessor Board
2. LCD Display
P/N 9-500-0255 6-9

Service Manual
2.3.1 Display Microprocessor Board

Use this procedure to remove and replace the Display Microprocessor Board (Figure
6-6, #1).
2. Disconnect the Control Panel Assembly from its mount (on the side of the
Gantry or from a remote location).
3. Turn the Control Panel upside down and remove the 4 screws that secure the
rear cover to the front cover. Lift the rear cover off of the assembly.
4. Disconnect the data input wire harness from BJ1 and the power wire harness
from BJ8.
5. Remove the rear cover from the wire harness and move it to a safe location.
6. Disconnect the keypad ribbon cable from BJ3 and disconnect the display back
light cable from BJ6.
7. Remove the four screws that attach the Display Microprocessor Board to the
front cover.
8. Lift the board off the cover and disconnect the display data cable from BJ2 on
the opposite side of the board.
9. Install the replacement Display Microprocessor by performing these steps in
reverse order.
10. Start the system and verify that all the screens are available and that all keypad
functions are operational.
2.3.2 Display Microprocessor Board Firmware Chip

Use this procedure to remove and replace the firmware chip mounted to the Display
Microprocessor Board (Figure 6-6, #1).
2. Disconnect the Control Panel Assembly from its mount (on the side of the
Gantry or from a remote location).
3. Turn the Control Panel upside down and remove the four screws that attach the
rear cover to the front cover. Lift the rear cover off the assembly.
4. Disconnect the data input wire harness from BJ1 and the power wire harness
from BJ8.
5. Remove the rear cover from the wire harness.
6. Locate the firmware chip (U2) on the Display Microprocessor Board and use a
PLCC extraction tool to remove the chip.
7. Install the replacement chip into the same socket. Be sure to line up the dot on
the chip with the arrow on the socket.
8. Reinstall the rear cover over the wire harness.
9. Reconnect the input data and power wire harnesses.
10. Reattach the rear cover to the front cover (four screws).
11. Reinstall the Control Panel Assembly.
12. Start the system and verify that all screens are available and that all keypad
functions are available.
6-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.3.3 LCD Display

Perform this procedure to remove and replace the LCD Display (Figure 6-6, #2). This
procedure requires that the Display Microprocessor be removed.
2. Disconnect the Control Panel Assembly from the mount on the side of the
Gantry, or from the remote location mount.
3. Remove the Display Microprocessor Board per Section 2.3.1, p. 6-10.
4. Remove the 4 screws that secure the LCD Display to the front cover.
5. Install the replacement LCD Display by reversing this procedure.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-11

Service Manual
2.4 Left-Side Gantry Components

See Figure 6-1 for the location of left-side Gantry components throughout the following
subsections.
2.4.1 High Voltage Generator Assembly
The High Voltage Generator Assembly consists of the following components:
• HV Multiplier
• HV Diode PCB Assembly (part of HV Multiplier)
• HV Inverter Board
• Capacitor Board (located on bottom of HV Inverter Board)
• HV Control Filament Board
WARNING! Always turn the system off before performing any removal or
replacement procedure.

Note… The HV Generator is assembled and calibrated at the factory and is certified
as a complied device. It must be replaced as an assembly.
The type of mounting plate used with the HV Generator Assembly determines the
remove and replace procedures used. Affinity Mammography Systems with a Serial
Number between xxxmmyy0001 and xxxmmyy0018 (xxx represents the system
series designator; mmyy represents the month and year of manufacture) require
removal of the HV Inverter Board and the HV Control Filament Board prior to
removing the HV Generator Assembly Mounting plate. See Figure 6-7. For those
systems with a Serial Number of xxxmmyy0019 or above, the HV Generator
Assembly can be removed as a single item. See Figure 6-8. The system Serial
Number is located on a nameplate on the rear of the Gantry. Refer to Chapter 1,
Figure 1-4, Label 1.
Affinity Serial Numbers 0001 through 0018
Remove the HV Generator Assembly (see Figure 6-7)
1. Remove power to system and access the High Voltage Generator Assembly by
removing the left side Gantry cover as described in Section 2.1.1.
2. On the top of the HV Multiplier, disconnect the HV cable from the HV cable
receptacle.
3. On the HV Inverter board, disconnect GJ1. Wait approximately 6 minutes
before proceeding (see WARNING below).

elapsed.
6-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
4. On the HV Inverter board, disconnect GJ2, GJ3, and GJ5. Remove any installed
cables ties.
5. Remove the Ribbon Cable between the HV Inverter board and the HV Control
Filament board. Set aside for re-installation later.
Figure 6-7: HV Generator Assembly (old style mounting plate)—Removal

1. HV Cable Receptacle
2. HV Multiplier
4. Ribbon Cable
6. Mounting Plate (old style)
P/N 9-500-0255 6-13

Service Manual
6. On the HV Control Filament board, disconnect all connectors.

7. Remove the 6 screws securing the HV Control Filament board to the standoffs
on the mounting plate. Remove board from standoffs and set aside.
8. Remove the hardware securing the HV Inverter board to the standoffs on the
mounting plate. Remove board from standoffs and set aside.
9. Locate and remove the hardware securing the lower portion of the mounting
plate to the Gantry frame.
10. While maintaining a secure hold on the HV Generator Assembly mounting
plate, remove the bolts securing the upper portion of the mounting plate to the
Gantry frame. Set the assembly aside.
11. Using the hardware removed in Steps 7 and 8, reinstall the HV Control Filament
and Inverter boards previously removed.
12. Reinstall the ribbon cable removed in Step 5 between the HV Inverter board and
HV Control Filament board.
13. Place the HV Generator Assembly (with boards and ribbon cable re-installed)
aside for packaging prior to shipping to Hologic for repair.
Install the New HV Generator Assembly
1. Unpack the new HV Generator Assembly and place on a level work surface.
2. On the HV Control Filament board, disconnect MJ1 and MJ2.
3. On the HV Inverter board, disconnect GJ2.
4. Remove the Ribbon Cable between the HV Inverter board and the HV Control
Filament board. Set aside for re-installation later.
5. Remove the hardware securing the HV Control Filament board to the standoffs
on the mounting plate. Remove board from standoffs and set aside.
6. Remove the hardware securing the HV Inverter board to the standoffs on the
mounting plate. Remove board from standoffs and set aside.
7. While maintaining a secure hold, position the HV Generator Assembly
mounting plate flush against the Gantry frame. Secure the upper portion of the
mounting plate in position using the bolts previously removed from the old
mounting plate
8. Secure the lower portion of the mounting plate to the Gantry frame using
hardware previously removed.
9. Using the hardware removed in Steps 5 and 6, install the new HV Control
Filament and Inverter boards on the mounting plate.
10. Reinstall the ribbon cable removed in Step 4 above between the HV Inverter
board and HV Control Filament board.
11. On the HV Control Filament board, install connectors.
12. On the HV Inverter board, install connectors. Dress wires using cable ties as
necessary.
13. On the top of the HV Multiplier, connect the HV cable to the receptacle.
14. Perform the following procedures before returning system to service:
• Chapter 4, Section 4.1, Tube Voltage Calibration, p. 4-9
• Chapter 4, Section 4.3, Filament Current (mA) Calibration, p. 4-12
• Chapter 4, Section 9.0, kV Control Offset Calibration, p. 4-64
6-14 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Affinity Serial Numbers 0019 and Above

Remove and Replace the HV Generator Assembly (see Figure 6-8)
2. Access the HV Generator Assembly by removing the left side Gantry cover.
3. On top of the HV Multiplier, disconnect the high voltage cable from the
receptacle.
4. On the HV Inverter board, disconnect GJ1. Wait approximately 5 minutes
before proceeding (see WARNING below).

(Brake Rail) on the HV Inverter Board are extinguished and an
additional 1 minute has elapsed.
5. On the HV Inverter board, disconnect connectors, and remove any installed

cable ties.
6. On the HV Control Filament board, disconnect all connectors.
7. Loosen the uppermost mounting screws securing the HV Generator Assembly
mounting plate to the Gantry.
8. While maintaining a secure hold on the HV Generator Assembly, remove the
remaining screws securing the assembly to the Gantry frame. Slide the assembly
up and out of the Gantry.
9. Reverse these procedures to replace the HV Generator Assembly.
10. Perform the following procedures before returning system to service:
P/N 9-500-0255 6-15

Service Manual
Figure 6-8: HV Generator Assembly (new style mounting plate)—Removal

1. Mounting Plate (new style)
4. HV Multiplier
5. HV Cable Receptacle
6. Uppermost Mounting Screws (2)
6-16 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.4.2 Power Control Board

The Power Control Board is positioned on the left side Gantry frame, near the center.
2. Access the Power Control Board by removing the left side Gantry cover as
described in Section 2.1.1.
3. Remove the wire harness connectors from their jacks.
4. Remove the data ribbon cable from the connector at TJ1.
5. Lift the board off of the 7 plastic standoffs.
6. Reverse procedures to replace the Power Control Board.
7. Perform the following procedure before returning system to service:
• Chapter 3, Section 2.3, Post-Startup Tests, p. 3-3.
2.4.3 Auxiliary Power Distribution Board

The Auxiliary Power Distribution Board is located at the bottom of the left side
Gantry frame.
2. Remove the left side Gantry cover to access the Power Distribution Board.
3. Remove the wire harness connectors.
4. Remove the 6 screws securing the board to the Gantry frame.
5. Reverse procedures to replace the Power Distribution Board.
6. Perform the following procedure before returning system to service:
• Chapter 3, Section 2.3, Post-Startup Tests, p. 3-3.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-17

Service Manual
2.5 Right-Side Gantry Components

See Figure 6-1, Gantry Components, for location of right-side Gantry components
throughout the following subsections.
2.5.1 Host Microprocessor Board

The Host Microprocessor Board is positioned near the center of the right side Gantry
frame. The Microprocessor houses the Affinity Series program firmware chip (U29).
To replace the firmware chip (U29) refer to Section 2.5.1.3. To replace the
calibration storage battery, refer to Section 2.5.1.2.

2.5.1.1 Replacing the Host Microprocessor Board Assembly

1. Record all of the system defaults on the Default Worksheet (see the
Operator’s Manual for User and Exposure Default Worksheets) and
download the calibration data as described in Chapter 5, Section 3.3.2,
Downloading Calibration Data, p. 5-13.
3. Access the Host Microprocessor Board by removing the right side Gantry
cover as described in Section 2.1.1.
4. Remove all of the wire harness connectors.
5. Remove the data ribbon cables from their connectors.
7. Replace the board by performing the above steps in reverse order.
8. Turn on the system.
9. Upload the calibration data as described in Chapter 5, Section 3.3.3,
Uploading Calibration Data, p. 5-14.
10. Perform the following setup and calibration procedures before releasing the
system to the user:
• Chapter 3, Section 4.0, Setting User Defaults, p. 3-14
• Chapter 4, Section 5.3, Initial Calibration—Large Focal Spot (Mo), p. 4-
21
• Chapter 4, Section 3.1, Compression Force Calibration, p. 4-7
• Chapter 4, Section 3.2, Compression Thickness Calibration, p. 4-8
6-18 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.5.1.2 Calibration Storage Battery

4. Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions to replace the battery.
6. Upload the calibration data as described in Chapter 5, Section 3.3.3.
system to the user:
21
P/N 9-500-0255 6-19

Service Manual
2.5.1.3 Firmware Chip

4. Use a PLCC chip remover to gently pry the firmware chip out of the socket
(see Figure 6-9).
5. Install the replacement firmware chip into the socket. Be sure to align the
dot on the chip with the arrow in the socket.
6. Upload the calibration data as described in Chapter 5, Section 3.3.3,
Uploading Calibration Data, p. 5-14.
system to the user:
21
Figure 6-9: Microprocessor Firmware Chip—Replacement
6-20 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.5.2 Communications Interface Board

The Communications Interface Board is mounted to the right side Gantry frame, just
below the Host Microprocessor Board.
1. Turn the system off and access the Communications Interface Board by
removing the right side Gantry cover as described in Section 2.1.1.
4. Reverse these steps to install the replacement board.
2.5.3 Low Voltage Power Supply

The Low Voltage Power Supply is mounted to the right side Gantry frame, below the
Interface/Fuse Board.
1. Turn the system off and access the Low Voltage Power Supply by removing the
right side Gantry cover as described in Section 2.1.1.
3. Remove the 4 screws from the standoffs on the Gantry frame. Note that a
ground wire is secured to the board using the lower right side screw.
4. Install the replacement Low Voltage Power Supply by reversing this procedure.
Be sure to secure the ground wire using the lower right side mounting screw.
5. Using a DMM, verify the +5 V as follows:
a. On the Host Microprocessor Board, connect the negative lead to TP10
(AGND), connect the positive lead to TP18 (+5 V).
b. On the DMM you should read +5.10 V (+.01 V), if not, adjust the +5 V
potentiometer on the LVPS.
2.5.4 C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board

The C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board is mounted to the right side Gantry frame,
near the bottom.
1. Turn the system off and access the C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board by
removing the right side Gantry cover as described in Section 2.1.1.
4. Reverse these steps to install the replacement C-arm Safety Microprocessor
Board. Do not reinstall the Gantry right side cover until after the board is
calibrated.
5. Perform the C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board Calibration procedures as
described in Chapter 4, Section 8.4, C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board
Calibration/Vertical Drive Force Load Cell Setting, p. 4-63, before releasing the
system to the user.
Note… The replacement board must be calibrated before the system is released to
the user.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-21

Service Manual
2.6 Internal Gantry Components

See Figure 6-1, page 6-2 for location of internal Gantry components throughout the
following subsections.
2.6.1 Main Circuit Breaker

The Power On/Off Circuit Breaker is accessed by removing the upper rear Gantry
panel.
2. Disconnect the system from the Mains input.
3. Access the Main Circuit Breaker by removing the upper rear Gantry panel as
described in Section 2.1.2.
4. Remove the 4 screws that secure the Circuit Breaker to the mounting bracket
(see Figure 6-10).
5. Pull the Circuit Breaker out and disconnect the six wires from the lugs on the
rear of the relay. Note each wire color/lug position.
6. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement Circuit Breaker.
Figure 6-10: Main Circuit Breaker—Removal
6-22 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.6.2 The C-arm Angle Detent Microswitch

The C-arm Detent Microswitch is on the rear of the vertical column, near the cam
disc. Access to the microswitch is through the upper rear Gantry panel.
1. Turn system on if necessary and rotate the C-arm to the 0° position.
3. Remove the upper rear Gantry panel as described in Section 2.1.2.
4. Locate the detent microswitch below the C-arm pivot tube cam disc.
5. Note the terminal locations of the two power wires to the switch, then remove
them.
6. Remove the 2 screws that secure the switch to the switch plate. Note that the
mounting holes through the switch plate are slotted to provide switch
adjustment.
Figure 6-11: C-arm Detent Microswitch—Removal
7. Plug the 2 previously removed power wires onto their respective lugs on the
replacement microswitch.
8. Install the new switch, but do not tighten the mounting screws.
10. With the C-arm still at the vertical (0°), verify that the trigger arm roller is in the
cam detent.
11. Adjust the switch height so that the switch actuator arm just closes the switch,
then tighten the mounting hardware.
12. Verify that the C-arm Rotation Angle Displays read 0°.
13. Rotate the C-arm and verify that the switch opens when the trigger arm roller is
out of the cam detent.
14. Rotate the C-arm to the following detent positions and verify correct rotation
angle display readings: ±45°, ±90°, ±135°, +180°.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-23

Service Manual
2.6.3 The C-arm Rotation Potentiometer

The C-arm rotation assembly is made up of a 10-turn, 500 ohm potentiometer with a
14-tooth gear and a timing belt.
1. Turn the system off, then remove the upper rear Gantry panel as described in
Section 2.1.2.
2. Remove the hardware (Figure 6-12, #1) that secure the potentiometer bracket
(Figure 6-12, #7) to the VTA. Carefully slip the sprocket off the timing belt
(Figure 6-12, #3).
3. Note the post locations of the 3 wires on the potentiometer (Figure 6-12, #6),
then cut them as close to the terminals as possible.
4. Pull the potentiometer with attached bracket out of the Gantry. Loosen the
clamp screw on the potentiometer shaft, then pull the clamp (Figure 6-12, #4)
and sprocket (Figure 6-12, #2) off together.
5. Remove the hex nut (Figure 6-12, #5) and internal tooth lock washer that secure
the potentiometer to the mounting bracket. Pull the potentiometer out of the
mounting bracket.
6. Secure the replacement potentiometer onto the mounting bracket using the
previously removed lock washer and hex nut.
7. Install the clamp and sprocket previously removed onto the potentiometer shaft.
8. Strip and tin the tips of the three wires previously cut, then solder them to their
respective posts on the potentiometer.
9. Loosely secure the potentiometer bracket on the VTA using the previously
removed hardware. Turn the potentiometer fully clockwise, then back off 1/4-
turn counterclockwise.
10. Turn on the system, then rotate the C-arm completely counterclockwise (-150°).
Carefully slip the belt onto the sprocket. Be sure that the teeth on the belt seat
firmly into the gears of the sprocket.
11. Tighten the belt by adjusting the position of the potentiometer bracket on the
VTA, then tighten the mounting screws. The tension is adjusted properly when
the belt deflection is approximately 1/4" using moderate pressure.
12. Rotate the C-arm through the entire range of rotation and verify that the rotation
angle display is accurate. When complete, reinstall all previously-removed
covers.

1.Screws
2.Sprocket
3.Timing Belt
4.Clamp
5.Hex Nut
6.Potentiometer
7.Mounting Bracket
Figure 6-12: C-arm Rotation Potentiometer—Removal
6-24 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
2.6.4 The C-arm Vertical Drive Actuator

The C-arm Up/Down Actuator assembly is mounted on the system base inside the
Gantry. Access to the entire assembly requires removal of the rear Gantry panels.
Figure 6-13: Shipping Collar Installation of VTA Rail
Remove the C-arm Vertical Drive Actuator as follows:

1. Remove the Upper Rear Gantry Panel (Section 2.1.2), the Rear Connector Panel
(Section 2.1.3) and the Lower Rear Panel (Section 2.1.4).
3. Raise the C-arm completely. If unable to raise the C-arm using the controls (due
to motor failure), raise C-arm manually.
4. Secure a shipping collar (Figure 6-13, #1), one can be obtained through Service
Support, to the right VTA rail (Figure 6-13, #2) (on the left as seen from the rear
of the Gantry) as shown in Figure 6-13.
5. Lower the C-arm until it stops on the collar.
6. Remove hub nut screws (Figure 6-14, #11) and lower hub nut (Figure 6-14, #9)
by hand.
8. Unplug the 4-pin connector from the C-arm drive actuator motor.
9. To release the lower portion of the actuator (Figure 6-14, #1), pull out the spring
clip (Figure 6-14, #2) in the end of the clevis pin (Figure 6-14, #3), then pull the
clevis pin from the isolation mount (Figure 6-14, #4).
P/N 9-500-0255 6-25

Service Manual
10. Loosen the screw that fastens the jam nut bracket (Figure 6-14, #5) to the jam
nut (Figure 6-14, #6), then remove the screw that fastens the bracket to the
standoff (Figure 6-14, #7) on the lower portion of the VTA isolation mount
(Figure 6-14, #8).
11. Thread the jam nut down 3 to 4 inches.
12. Remove the two screws that secure the hub nut (Figure 6-14, #9) to the VTA
isolation mount, then thread the hub nut down to the jam nut.
13. Remove the actuator assembly from the unit by pulling the motor forward and
sliding the lead screw down, then out of the VTA isolation mount.
14. To install the replacement actuator assembly, tilt the actuator lead screw toward
the system, then slide the lead screw up and through the top isolation mount.
15. Position the actuator motor into the bottom isolation mount, then align the holes
in the mount with the hole in the base of the motor assembly.
16. Insert the clevis pin through the holes, then reinstall the spring clip to secure the
clevis pin.
17. Thread the hub nut along the lead screw until its top surface is approximately
5-5/8" from where the lead screw enters the motor assembly.
18. Plug the 4-pin connector into the motor.

1. Standoff
2. Jam Nut Bracket
3. Hub Nut Screws
4. Actuator
5. Isolation Mount
6. Spring Clip
7. Clevis Pin
8. Jam Nut
9. Hub Nut
10. VTA Isolation Mount
11. Vertical Travel Assembly 11
Figure 6-14: Components of the Vertical Drive Assembly
6-26 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual

20. Hold the hub nut to prevent it from turning, then press a C-arm Up button to run
the hub nut up the lead screw until it contacts the top isolation mount.
21. Secure the hub nut to the top isolation mount, using the previously-removed
mounting screws.
22. Turn the jam nut to move it up the lead screw until it contacts the bottom of the
hub nut. When contact is made, lower the jam nut just until the threaded hole
in its side faces the direction of the standoff on the isolation mount. Finally,
lower the jam nut one complete turn.
23. Secure the jam nut bracket to the standoff on the isolation mount using a button-
head screw, then tighten the screw that secures the bracket to the jam nut.
24. Grease the lead screw, then remove the shipping collar installed previously.
25. Reinstall the previously removed covers and panels except for the right Gantry
cover.
26. Perform the following calibration procedures:
• Chapter 4, Section 8.4, C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board Calibration/
Vertical Drive Force Load Cell Setting, p. 4-63
P/N 9-500-0255 6-27

Service Manual
C-Arm Components—Remove and Replace
3.0 C-Arm Components—Remove and Replace

This section describes the following remove and replace procedures:
• C-arm Frame Components (Section 3.1)
• Tubehead Components (Section 3.2)
• Compression Assembly (Section 3.3)
• Image Receptor Support Device Components (Section 3.4)
Use the following illustration and legend to identify parts on the C-arm Frame
(see Figure 6-15).

1. Patient Handle
2. Filament Protection Board
3. Face Shield
4. Compression Device
5. 7-Position Switch Board
6. C-arm Accessory Detect
Board
7. C-arm Switch Interface Board
8. 3-Position Switch Board
Figure 6-15: C-arm Frame Components
6-28 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Use the following illustration and legend to identify parts on the Tubehead and on the Beam
Limiting Assembly (see Figure 6-16).
Mo
Rh
C
M
Figure 6-16: Tubehead/Beam Limiting Components

1. Filament Protect Board
2. Tubehead Control Board
3. Light Field Lamp Assembly (part of Beam Limiting Assembly)
4. Filter Position Detectors (part of Beam Limiting Assembly)
5. Motorized Mirror Assembly (part of Beam Limiting Assembly)
6. Filter Shifter Assembly (part of Beam Limiting Assembly)
7. Aperture Detect Board (part of Beam Limiting Assembly)
8. X-ray Tube
9. Tube Fan
10. C-arm Cooling Fan
P/N 9-500-0255 6-29

Service Manual
Use the following illustration and legend to identify parts on the Compression Device (see
Figure 6-17).
Figure 6-17: Compression Device Components

1. Compression Motor and Brake Assembly
2. Compression Timing Belt
3. Compression Thickness Potentiometer
4. Compression Chain
5. Compression Tray Sensor Board
6. Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly
7. Compression Force and Thickness Display Board
6-30 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Use the following illustration and legend to identify parts on the Image Receptor Support
Device (see Figure 6-18).
Figure 6-18: IRSD Components

1. AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor Board
2. AEC Position Detector Board
3. AEC Detector Assembly
4. Accessory Detect Board
P/N 9-500-0255 6-31

Service Manual
3.1 C-Arm Frame Components

This section details the removal and replacement procedures for the components on the C-
arm Frame. The alignment, adjustment and/or calibration procedures are provided as
required.
3.1.1 Patient Face Shield Installation and Removal

The Face Shield (Figure 6-19) prevents the patient’s head and face from entering the
X-ray field during the examination. The Face Shield mounts to the tubehead and
surrounds the X-ray tube port. To install the Face Shield follow these steps:
1. Position the Face Shield so that its open side faces the C-arm and the smaller
end faces the tubehead.
2. Slide the open end of the Face Shield into the slots on the tubehead mount.
3. Push the Face Shield completely on the mount.
4. To remove, pull the sides of the shield out (away from the tubehead), then slide
the shield off the mount.
Figure 6-19: Patient Face Shield
Note… For exposure other than magnification studies, always ensure that the Face
Shield is attached. Remember to verify its condition prior to use each day.
The Face Shield does not offer protection from exposure through the acrylic.
6-32 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.1.2 C-arm Frame Covers

Remove these covers to gain access to the C-arm Switch Boards, the C-arm Switch
Interface Board, the C-arm Accessory Detect Board, and the Filament Protection
Board.
Patient Handle
1. Remove the decorative caps from the screw access holes on the patient handle.
2. Remove the four screws that secure the patient handle (Figure 6-20, #1) onto the
rear of the C-arm.
3. Lift the handle away from the system and set it aside.
C-arm Top Cover
2. Remove the decorative caps from the screw access holes on the C-arm Top
Cover (Figure 6-20, #2).
3. Loosen the screws, then slide the cover back and off the C-arm.
4. Disconnect the 3-position switch wiring harness (Figure 6-20, #3) from the
switch pad on the cover.
C-arm Bottom Cover
2. Remove the decorative caps from the screw access holes on the C-arm Bottom
Cover (Figure 3.1.3, #4).
3. Remove the screws, then pull the cover off the C-arm.
C-arm Side Covers
2. Remove the patient handle and the C-C-arm bottom cover as described in Steps
above.
3. Use pliers to pull the C-arm Side Covers (Figure 6-20, #5) down approximately
one (1) inch - until the spring clips disengage.
4. Pull the cover away from the system frame.
5. Disconnect the 7-position switch wiring harnesses (Figure 6-20, #6) from the
switch pads on the cover.
C-arm Upper Rear Cover
2. Remove the patient handle and the C-arm top cover as described in Steps
above.
3. Pull the C-arm Upper Rear Cover (Figure 6-20, #7) up approximately one inch
until the spring clips disengage.
4. Pull the cover away from the system frame.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-33

Service Manual
C-arm Lower Rear Cover

2. Remove the patient handle, the C-arm bottom cover, and the left and ride side
covers as described in Steps above.
3. Remove two screws securing the C-arm Lower Rear Panel (Figure 6-20, #7) to
the C-arm frame.
4. Disconnect the ground wire from the lower rear cover.
5. Pull the lower rear cover down approximately one inch until the spring clips
disengage.
6. Pull cover away from the system frame.
Figure 6-20: C-arm Frame Covers

1. Patient Handle
2. C-Arm Upper Rear Cover
3. 7-Position Switch Wiring Harness (4, 2 Left and 2 Right)
4. C-Arm Lower Rear Cover
5. C-Arm Side Covers (2, Left and Right)
6. C-Arm Bottom Cover
7. 3-Position Switch Wiring Harness
8. C-Arm Top Cover
6-34 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.1.3 Filament Protection Board

The Filament Protection Board is mounted on the top of the C-arm frame. Access to
this component requires removal of the C-arm Top Cover.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the C-arm Top Cover as described in Section 3.1.2.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the 3-position C-arm Switch Pad on the Top
Cover.
3. Locate the Filament Protection Board on the C-arm Frame. Disconnect the wire
harness connectors from their jacks.
4. Remove the 4 screws that secure the board to the standoffs on the C-arm frame,
then lift the board out of the system. See Figure 6-21.
5. Install the replacement Filament Protection Board by reversing this procedure.
Figure 6-21: Filament Protection Board—Removal
3.1.4 3-Position Switch Board

The 3-Position C-arm Switch Board is a triple switch membrane-type pad used to
control C-arm Up, C-arm Down, and C-arm Rotation Release. The switch pad has
an adhesive which secures it to the C-arm Top Cover.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the C-arm Top Cover as described in Section 3.1.2.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from 3-position C-arm Switch Pad on Top Cover.
3. Peel the 3-Position Switch Pad off of the Top Cover. See Figure 6-22. Pull the
ribbon cable and connector through the slot in the top cover to remove.
4. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement 3-Position Switch Pad.
5. Turn the system on, then perform the Tubehead Controls Functional Tests as
described in Chapter 3, Table 3-2, “Post Startup Tests—Tubehead and
Footswitches” page 3-6.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-35

Service Manual
3.1.5 7-Position Switch Board

The C-arm houses four 7-Position C-arm Switch Boards, two on each side of the C-
arm. The boards, which are membrane-type switch pads, mount to the C-arm Side
Covers using an adhesive backing.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the C-arm Bottom Cover as described in Section
3.1.2.
2. Remove the appropriate C-arm Side Cover (left or right) as described in Section
3.1.2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the upper and lower switch pad
connectors.
3. Peel the 7-Position Switch Pad in question off of the Side Cover. See Figure 6-22.
Pull the ribbon cable and connector through slot in side cover to remove it.
4. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement 7-Position Switch Pad.
5. Turn the system on; perform the C-arm Controls Functional Tests as described in
Chapter 3, Table 3-1, “Post Startup Tests—C-arm Controls” page 3-5.
Figure 6-22: C-arm Switch Pads—Removal
6-36 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.1.6 C-arm Switch Interface Board

The C-arm Switch Interface Board (Figure 6-15, #5) is mounted to the C-arm frame,
and is accessed by removing the Left Side C-arm Cover. This circuit board is the
interface between the five C-arm Switch Boards and the Affinity Series
Microprocessor.
3.1.2.
2. Remove the left side C-arm Side Cover as described in Section 3.1.2.
Disconnect the wiring harness from the upper and lower switch pad connectors.
Set the cover aside.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the jacks.
4. Remove the board from the plastic standoffs.
5. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement C-arm Switch Interface Board.
6. When complete, perform the C-arm Switch Functional Test as described in
Chapter 3, Table 3-1, “Post Startup Tests—C-arm Controls” page 3-5.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-37

Service Manual
3.1.7 C-arm Accessory Detect Board

The C-arm Accessory Detect Board (see Figure 6-23) is mounted to the C-arm frame,
and is accessed by removing the Left Side C-arm Cover. This circuit board - which
houses two optical sensors - detects when a magnification platform or a stereotactic
accessory (if available) is installed. When a magnification accessory is installed, the
“MODE =” field on the Run Mode Screen reads “MAG MAN”.
3.1.2.
2. Remove the left side C-arm Side Cover as described in Section 3.1.2.
Disconnect the wiring harness from the upper and lower switch pad connectors.
Set the cover aside.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the jack on the circuit board.
4. Remove the 2 screws that secure the detect board to the board mount on the C-
arm frame. Pull the board from the system.
5. Install the replacement C-arm Accessory Detect Board by reversing this
procedure.
6. Turn the system on. Using a piece of paper or cardboard, block each sensor
individually and verify the Run Mode Screen changes accordingly.
Figure 6-23: C-Arm Accessory Detect Board—Removal
6-38 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.2 Tubehead Components

This section describes the removal and replacement procedures for the components inside
the tubehead assembly, including the X-ray tube and the beam limiting device. Alignment,
adjustment or calibration instructions are provided.
3.2.1 Tubehead Covers

The X-ray tubehead enclosure is comprised of an upper cover and a lower cover
(Figure 6-24). The lower cover must be removed first.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the aperture (if installed) from the slit in the
tubehead.
2. Remove the screw that secures the front of the lower cover. Access this screw
from the bevel in the aperture slot.
3. Pull the front of the lower cover down slightly to free it from the upper cover,
then pull it away from the C-arm.
4. Remove the 2 screws (#1) that secure the front of the upper cover to the
tubehead chassis. Pull the upper cover up and off of the C-arm until the
alignment holes on the rear of the cover clear the locating pins on the C-arm
Frame.
5. Reverse these steps to install the upper and lower tubehead covers.
Mo
Rh
C
M
Figure 6-24: Tubehead Covers—Removal
P/N 9-500-0255 6-39

Service Manual
3.2.2 X-ray Tube

Removal of the X-ray tube (Figure 6-25) requires complete calibration of the X-ray
system and Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) system. Access the X-ray Tube by
removing the upper and lower tubehead covers.
1. Ensure the system is off, and remove the tubehead covers as described in
Section 3.2.1.
2. Remove the Top and Upper Rear C-arm covers as described in Section 3.1.2.
3. Remove the high voltage lead from the rear of the X-ray tube. The connector is a
1/4-turn quick disconnect.
4. Unscrew the filament connector from the receptacle on the rear of the X-ray
tube.
5. Remove the 2 screws that secure the rear of the tube to the mounting cradle on
the tubehead chassis.
6. Remove the 4 mounting screws that secure the X-ray tube to the front of the
tubehead chassis. Access these screws from below, through the beam limiting
assembly. Lift the tube out of the system.
7. Position the replacement tube in the tubehead so that the threaded holes in the
front of the X-ray tube align with the mounting holes in the tubehead chassis.
8. Loosely install the front 4 and the rear 2 mounting screws.
9. Tighten the 4 front mounting screws completely, then tighten the 2 screws on
the rear of the tube.
6-40 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Figure 6-25: X-ray Tube—Removal
10. Install the high voltage lead and the filament connector to their receptacles on
the rear of the X-ray tube.
11. Reset the Exposure Counter. See Section 3.2.2.1.
12. Perform the following exposure system setup procedures:
• Section 4.1, Tube Voltage Calibration
• Section 4.3, Filament Current (mA) Calibration
• Section 5.3, Initial Calibration—Large Focal Spot (Mo)
P/N 9-500-0255 6-41

Service Manual
13. When the exposure control system is calibrated, perform the following
compliance tests (Chapter 4):
• Section 6.1, Half-Value Layer
• Section 6.2, Reproducibility and Linearity in Manual Mode
• Section 6.3, Reproducibility in Auto-Time Mode
• Section 6.4, Reproducibility in Auto-kV Mode
• Section 6.5, Reproducibility in Auto-Filter Mode
• Section 7.0, X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment Procedures
• Section 5.1, AEC Detector Gain Calibration
3.2.2.1 Exposure Counter Reset
The Affinity Series keeps track of the number of exposures made. Whenever the
X-ray tube is replaced, it is necessary to clear - or reset - the exposure counter to
accurately tabulate the number of exposures made with the new X-ray tube.
Note… This procedure is only necessary after installing a replacement X-ray tube.
1. If the system is not in service mode, refer to Chapter 4, Section 2.1, Entering
Calibration Mode, p. 4-2 and set the system for the service mode (S2 switch
1 = ON).
2. Access the Debug Screen (Chapter 3, Figure 3-9) and record the number of
exposures taken since last reset (data line EXP:).
3. Access Calibration Screen #3 (Figure 4-3).
4. Highlight the Special field. Press a Change key until the field reads: Clear
Exp Cnt.
5. Press Reset + Comp. Release at the same time to reset the exposure counter.
6-42 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.2.3 Tubehead Control Board

1. Turn the system off. Remove the aperture (if installed) from the slot in the
tubehead, then remove the tubehead covers as described in Section 3.2.1.
Note… If it is only necessary to replace the firmware chip (U9), skip to Step 6 now.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors on the Tubehead Control Board
(Figure 6-26). Note their locations.
S1 S2 S3 S4
Figure 6-26: Tubehead Control Board—Removal
3. Remove the five screws that secure the Tubehead Control Board to the standoffs
on the tubehead chassis.
4. Pull the board out of the unit.
5. Reverse procedures to replace the board. Skip to Step 7.
6. Replace the Firmware Chip (U9) as described in Section 2.5.1.3, Firmware
Chip, then go to Step 7.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-43

Service Manual
7. Verify the board operation as follows (refer to Table 6-1and Figure 6-26):
a. Turn the system on.
b. Press S1 once on Tubehead Control Board, verify the Auto-Aperture moves
out of the field.
c. Press S1 a second time, verify the Auto-Aperture moves back in.
d. Press S2, verify the lamp and mirror assemblies move out of field.
e. Press S4, verify the lamp and mirror assemblies move back in.
f. Press S3, verify the filter select mechanism changes position.
g. Press S4, verify the entire collimator assembly cycles in and out of field.
Table 6-1: Tubehead Control Board Push Button Switches.
Switch Function
S1 Auto-Aperture Select
S2 Light Field Lamp Assy/Motorized Mirror Assy Select
S3 Filter Select
S4 Collimator Assy Select

9. Reinstall all covers and return to service.
6-44 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.2.4 C-Arm Cooling Fan

The C-arm Cooling Fan is mounted to the lower portion of the C-arm Top Plate
(Figure 6-27, #4).
1. Turn the system off. Remove the C-arm Top and Upper Rear Covers as described
in Section 3.1.2.
2. Disconnect the fan wiring harness from the Filament Protect Board (Figure 6-27,
#3). Note the locations if they are not labeled.
3. Remove the Filament Protect Board as described in Section 3.1.3, Steps 2
through 4.
4. Remove the 2 screws (Figure 6-27, #2) that secure the fan mounting bracket
(Figure 6-27, #1) to the C-arm Top Plate. Pull the fan out of the system.
5. Install the replacement cooling fan by reversing this procedure. Ensure the air
flow is as shown in Figure 6-27, View B.
6. Before installing the tubehead covers, turn the system on and verify that the fan
operates.
Figure 6-27: C-Arm Cooling Fan—Removal

1. Filament Protect Board
2. Mounting Bracket
3. Mounting Hardware
4. C-Arm Top Plate
P/N 9-500-0255 6-45

Service Manual
3.2.5 Beam Limiting Assembly

The Beam Limiting Assembly consists of the following components:
• Aperture Detect Board
• Dual Filter Assembly (with Filter Position Detectors)
• Light Field Lamp Assembly with Fan
• Motorized Mirror Assembly
3.2.6 Aperture Detect Board
The Aperture Detect board (Figure 6-28, #1) is mounted on the beam limiting device
at the rear of the aperture slot. This board contains four optical sensors that detect
• The presence of an aperture and
• The type of aperture installed.
1. Remove the lower tubehead covers as described in Section 3.2.1.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the Tubehead Control Board (Figure 6-26).
Note location.
3. Remove the 2 mounting screws that secure the board to the tubehead chassis.
Pull the board out of the system.
4. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement Aperture Detect Board. Do not
reinstall the tubehead covers at this time.
Figure 6-28: Aperture Detect Board—Removal

5. Verify that the optical sensors on the board are working properly as follows:
a. Block each sensor with a piece of dark color paper. The left most sensor is
sensor #1; the right most sensor is sensor #4.
b. A corresponding LED on the Tubehead Control Board lights when each
sensor is blocked, then goes out when unblocked (see the matrix below).
Optical Sensor 1 2 3 4
Tubehead Control Board LED D3 D2 D5 D4
6. Reinstall the tubehead covers.
6-46 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.2.7 Filter Shifter Assembly

The Filter Shifter Assembly has two optical detectors mounted on the Filter Slide
Mechanism to sense which filter is below the X-ray tube port.
1. Remove the lower tubehead cover as described in Section 3.2.1.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the Motor Control Board.
3. Cut the cable ties that secure the Auto Filter harness to the tubehead.
4. Loosen and remove the 4 mounting screws (2 front, 2 rear) that secure the Filter
Shifter assembly mounting bracket to the tubehead frame. These screws are
accessed from the right side of the tubehead frame.
5. Slide the assembly out from the right side. Use care not to damage the filters or
other collimator components (lamp, mirror, etc.).
6. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement Filter Shifter assembly.
7. Verify that the Filter Shifter motor functions.
a. Turn the system on.
b. Press S4 on the motor control board and verify that the motor cycles the
filter in one direction.
c. Press S4 again and verify that the motor cycles the filter in the opposite
direction.
d. Turn the system off.
8. Reinstall the tubehead covers.
10. Perform the Half-Value Layer Performance Test (Chapter 4, Section 6.1, Half-
Value Layer, p. 4-36).
11. Perform the X-ray Tubehead Leakage Test (Chapter 4, Section 6.11, X-ray
Tubehead Leakage Test, p. 4-47).
12. Make exposures using both filters. Inspect the developed films for artifacts.
Figure 6-29: Filter Shifter Assembly—Removal
P/N 9-500-0255 6-47

Service Manual
3.2.8 Light Field Lamp Assembly with Fan

To replace a blown lamp within the Light Field Lamp Assembly, refer to Section
3.2.9. To replace the fan within the Light Field Lamp Assembly, refer to Section
3.2.10
1. Remove the tubehead covers as described in Section 3.2.1.
2. Remove the C-arm Top Cover as described in Section 3.1.2, Step 2.
3. On the Filament Protect Board (Figure 6-16, #2), disconnect the fan power
cable.
4. Disconnect the Light Field Lamp Assembly wiring harness from the Tubehead
Control Board (Figure 6-16, #9).
5. Loosen and remove the 4 mounting screws (Figure 6-30, #3) that secure the
Light Field Lamp Assembly to the tubehead frame.
6. Slide the assembly out taking care not to damage the lamp or other collimator
components (mirror, filter, etc.).
7. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement Light Field Lamp Assembly
with Fan.
8. Perform the following procedures prior to releasing the system to the user:
• Chapter 4, Section 7.0, X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment
Procedures, p. 4-48
Figure 6-30: Light Field Lamp Assembly with Fan—Removal
6-48 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.2.9 Light Field Lamp Assembly—Lamp Replacement

2. Remove the two screws that secure the lamp socket to the lamp housing (Figure
6-30, #1).
3. Pull the lamp and socket out of the housing.
4. Remove the lamp from the socket. Press down on the bulb slightly while turning
it 1/4-turn to remove.
5. Using care not to get finger oil on bulb (by touching it), install the replacement
lamp into the socket, then install the socket into the lamp housing.
6. Tighten the mounting hardware.
7. Perform the following procedures prior to releasing the system to the user:
• Section 7.11, Light Field Edge Contrast Test
• Section 7.12, Light Field Illuminance Test
3.2.10 Light Field Lamp Assembly—Fan Replacement

The Light Field Lamp Assembly Cooling Fan (Figure 6-30, #4) is mounted to the rear
bracket of the Light Field Lamp Assembly, directly in front of the Tubehead Control
Board.
1. Remove the lower tubehead cover as described in Section 3.2.1, and the upper
C-arm cover as described in Section 3.1.2.
2. Disconnect the fan wiring harness from the receptacle on the Filament Protect
Board (Figure 6-16). Note the harness location if it is not labeled.
3. Remove the 2 screws that secure the fan to the fan mounting bracket. Pull the
fan out of the system.
4. Install the replacement cooling fan by reversing this procedure.
5. Before installing the tubehead covers, turn the system on and verify that the fan
operates.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-49

Service Manual
3.2.11 Motorized Mirror Assembly

The Motorized Mirror Assembly (Figure 6-31) mounts to a bracket on the tubehead
chassis and is removed as an assembly.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the Tubehead Control Board (Figure 6-16).
Note locations.
3. Remove the 4 socket head screws (Figure 6-31) that secure the Motorized Mirror
Assembly to the mounting bracket on the left side of the beam limiting device.
4. Pull the entire assembly from the system.
5. Position the replacement Motorized Mirror Assembly in the mounting bracket
and secure it with the previously removed hardware.
6. Connect wiring harness to the Tubehead Control Board as noted in Step 2
above.
Figure 6-31: Motorized Mirror Assembly—Removal

8. On the Tubehead Control Board (Figure 6-26), push S4 to cycle the mirror
assembly completely forward so that the flag blocks the front sensor.
9. Verify that D8 on the Tubehead Control Board illuminates momentarily.
10. Push S2 to cycle the mirror assembly completely back so that the flag blocks the
rear sensor.
11. Verify that D9 on the Tubehead Control Board illuminates (stays lit).
12. Push S4 to cycle mirror assembly back to original position.
13. Set the system for a short exposure.
14. Verify that the mirror cycles out of the X-ray field before making the exposure,
then cycles back over the tube port after the exposure.
15. When complete, install the tubehead covers.
6-50 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.3 Compression Assembly

This section details the removal and replacement procedures for the components that make
up the Compression Assembly. The alignment, adjustment and/or calibration procedures are
provided as required.
3.3.1 Compression Device Covers

Access to the serviceable components and assemblies of the C-arm are through
these covers:
• Upper Compression Device Cover
• Lower Compression Device Cover
Note… The top and bottom Compression Device covers are fastened to the
compression bellows. Use care not to damage the bellows when removing
these covers.
1. Remove the mounting hardware that fastens the Compression Device covers
(top and bottom) to the Compression Device. (See Figure 6-17.)
2. Carefully lift the covers off the Compression Device to access the following
components:
• Compression Clutch
• Compression Clutch brake
• Compression Drive
• Compression Brake
• Compression Tray Sensor Board
• Compression Force and Thickness Boards
3. Disconnect the wiring between the covers and the Compression Device,
including 1 ground wire for each cover.
4. Reverse procedures to reinstall the Compression Device Covers.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-51

Service Manual
3.3.2 Compression Motor and Brake Assembly

The Compression Motor assembly is mounted on a rail inside the C-arm frame (near
the bottom). Access to this assembly requires removal of the C-arm covers.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the C-arm top and bottom covers and the upper
and lower Compression Device covers (as described in Section 3.3.1).
2. Raise the compression device completely using the manual handwheels.
3. Continue to turn the handwheels to rotate the compression motor sprocket until
the cam-lock set screw (on the compression motor sprocket) is accessible.
Loosen the set screw 1/2-turn.
Note… The cam-lock set screw is recessed further in the compression motor
sprocket than the key-way set screw, which is flush when tight.
4. Turn the handwheel again to continue rotating the motor sprocket to access the
key-way set screws. Loosen this set screw 1/2-turn.
5. Remove the 2 screws (Figure 6-32, #1) that hold the compression motor and the
motor mounting plate to the C-arm rail. Remove the motor and mounting plate
from the C-arm.
6. Note the polarity of the wires on the compression motor, then disconnect them.
Pull the motor out from the mounting plate, until the motor shaft clears the
plate, then pull the motor out from the C-arm.
7. Transfer the mounting plate to the new motor, then reverse this procedure to
install the replacement motor assembly.
8. Turn the system on and verify that the motor works by cycling the motor in each
direction using the compression controls.
9. When complete, perform the Compression Chain Tension Adjustment as
described in Chapter 4, Section 8.1.
Figure 6-32: Compression Motor and Brake Assembly—Removal
6-52 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.3.3 Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly

The Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake assembly is made up of a clutch
mechanism, a brake, a handwheel assembly, and a series of gears and sprockets.
Access to this assembly requires removal of the top and bottom compression device
covers.
Remove the Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly
2. Remove the top and bottom compression device covers as described in Section
3.3.1.
3. Loosen the set screws that secure the right side compression knob (Figure 6-33,
#5) to the clutch shaft (Figure 6-33, #1).
4. Slide the knob off the shaft.
5. Loosen the screws that secure the locking bar (Figure 6-33, #6) to the clutch
shaft.
6. Slide the clutch shaft out of the compression device from the left side.
7. Remove the slip clutch (Figure 6-33, #4) from the compression device. If it is
only necessary to replace the clutch, skip steps 8, 9, and 10.
8. Remove the screws that secure the clutch brake magnet assembly (Figure 6-33,
#2) to the left side compression device frame.
9. Remove the clutch brake magnet assembly and the brass spacer (Figure 6-33,
#3) from the compression device.
10. Remove the clutch brake harness connector from the main harness.
Install the New Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly
1. Install the replacement clutch brake and tighten the mounting screws.
2. Connect the clutch brake harness to the main wiring harness.
3. Slide the clutch shaft into the compression device from the left side until the
shaft end protrudes through the opening in the clutch brake.
4. Slide the brass spacer (raised edge first) over the shaft and into the brake.
5. Place the armature on the end of the replacement clutch (machined side toward
the brake).
6. Slide the clutch shaft through the clutch, then out the opposite side of the
compression device.
7. Install the previously removed knob and tighten the set screws.
8. Adjust the clutch shaft by sliding it back and forth until both knobs are equal
distances from the sides of the compression device.
9. Place a .015" feeler gauge (or equivalent shim stock) between the armature and
the clutch brake.
10. Spread the clutch mechanism so that the clutch sprocket is pressed firmly
against the chain gears (at right), and that the armature is pressed against the
feeler gauge.
11. Tighten the locking bar mounting hardware, then remove the feeler gauge.
12. Confirm that the gap between the armature and the brake is .010" (minimum) to
.020" (maximum). Verify that there is no more than .020” left-to-right “play” in
the clutch.
13. Verify proper compression movement.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-53

Service Manual
14. Perform the following before releasing the system to the user:
• Chapter 4, Section 8.1, Compression Chain Tension Adjustment, p. 4-61
Figure 6-33: Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly—Removal

1. Clutch Shaft
2. Brass Spacer
3. Locking Bar
4. Compression Knob
5. Slip Clutch
6. Clutch Brake Magnet Assembly
3.3.4 Force Load Cell

2. Remove the top Compression Device cover, (refer to Section 3.3.1, p. 6-51).
3. Remove bottom screws that hold the load cell to the bottom plate. Figure 6-34.
4. Loosen the set screws that secure the right side compression knob to the clutch
shaft.
Figure 6-34: Removing the Force Load Cell
6-54 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
5. Slide the knob off the shaft.

6. Loosen the screws that secure the locking bar to the clutch shaft. Figure 6-34 (#1).
7. Slide the clutch shaft out of the Compression Device from the left side and note
the position and orientation of all parts removed from the assembly.
8. Remove the load cell from the Compression Device by removing the two hex-
head screws. The spring wrap in the side pulls the load cell up.
9. Remove the gear on the load cell housing, holding it with the chain attached, in
your left hand and slide the load cell off with the right.
10. While still holding the gear and chain, slide the new wire for the load cell in
between the chain loop and place the load cell on the bottom plate.
11. Replace the top screw on the new load cell into the Compression Device.
12. Tilt the load cell to outside slightly and replace the socket gear with the chain
loop, using the original hardware.
13. Push the load cell down onto the lower plate, and replace both screws in the
lower plate.
14. Re-install the bottom screw that fastens the load cell to the Compression Device.
15. Slide the compression clutch shaft into the load cell and test to see if it slides
smoothly. If not, loosen the lower screws and adjust until the shaft travels smoothly.
16. Re-assemble the compression clutch and brake assembly and adjust following
steps 8 through 13 in Section 3.3.3, p. 6-53.
18. With the Compression Device covers still off, carefully move the Compression
Device with the Compression Up and Down buttons to be sure the
Compression Device moves. If it does not move, reverse procedures and adjust.
19. To calibrate the Force Load Cell, perform the following procedure:
• Chapter 4, Section 8.3, Compression Force Load Cell Setting, p. 4-63
20. Reinstall the Compression Device covers.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-55

Service Manual
3.3.5 Compression/AEC Position Display Boards

The Compression/AEC Position Display Boards (left and right, see Figure 6-35) provide
readouts for compression thickness, compression force, and the position of the AEC
Detector. These display boards mount to the inside of the top Compression Device cover.
1. Turn the system off, then remove the Compression Device covers as described
in Section 3.3.1.
2. Disconnect the cable connectors from the Compression / AEC Position Display
Board to be removed (left or right).
3. Remove the hardware that secures the Compression / AEC Position Display
Board (to be removed) to the standoffs on the top cover.
4. Reverse these steps to install the replacement display board.
5. Perform the following before releasing the system to the user:
Figure 6-35: Compression / AEC Position Display Boards—Removal
3.3.6 Compression Tray Sensor Board

The Compression Tray Sensor board (Figure 6-17, #4) is mounted to the compression
device deck. Access to this board requires removal of both compression device
covers.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the compression device covers as described in
Section 3.3.1.
2. Remove the wiring harness connector from the rear of the board.
3. Loosen and remove the mounting screws that secure the board to the
compression device deck.
4. Lift the board out from the compression device.
5. To install the replacement Compression Tray Sensor board, reverse these steps.
6. Before releasing the system to the user, verify that the board is working. Turn
the system on, then enter the Run Mode.
7. Install a compression paddle and confirm that system status changes from “Standby”
to “Ready”. Remove the paddle and verify that system status returns to “Standby”.
6-56 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.3.7 Compression Thickness Potentiometer

The Compression Thickness Potentiometer is a 5,000-ohm, 10-turn potentiometer
that mounts to the left side bulkhead of the compression device frame.
2. Remove any installed compression accessory.
3. Remove the C-arm bottom cover and the left side cover as described in Section
3.1.2.
4. Remove the Tubehead covers as described in Section 3.2.1.
5. Remove the top and bottom compression device covers (Section 3.3.1).
6. Loosen the two allen screws securing the Compression Timing Belt to the
Tubehead Support Plate (Figure 6-36, #1). Remove the timing belt from the
upper clamp block (Figure 6-36, #2).
Figure 6-36: Removal of Timing Belt from Upper Block Assembly

1. Tubehead Support Plate
2. Upper Clamp Block
P/N 9-500-0255 6-57

Service Manual
7. Gently thread the timing belt down and out of the pulleys. Inspect the timing
belt, and if it is damaged, replace it as follows:
a. Remove the IRSD covers.
b. Loosen the two screws securing the belt in the lower clamp block. They are
located through the rear of the IRSD and under the bellows assembly.
Remove the belt and discard it.
c. Insert the new belt through the lower clamp on the Tubehead Support Plate.
Tighten screws enough to secure belt in place.
d. Thread the timing belt through the pulleys, ensuring the potentiometer does
not move and the timing belt does not twist.
e. Insert the timing belt through the upper clamp block (see Figure 6-36).
Apply Blue Loctite 242 and tighten screws.
f. Loosen screws securing timing belt in lower clamp block. While holding on
to the bottom of the timing belt, raise the compression device to the top of
its travel.
g. Affix the Field Service Belt Adjustment Tool (PN 9-061-0107) to the bottom
of the timing belt and loosen the screws securing the belt in the bottom
clamp. Apply Blue Loctite 242 and tighten screws.
Figure 6-37: Removal of Timing Belt from Bearing Block Assembly

1. Bearing Block Assembly
2. Lower Clamp Block
6-58 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
8. Locate the 3 colored wires soldered to potentiometer. Note the colored wire for
each post and desolder the wires. See Figure 6-38.
Figure 6-38: Compression Thickness Potentiometer—Removal

1. Clamp Screw
2. Sprocket
3. Hex Nut
4. Potentiometer Shaft
5. Mounting Bracket
9. Remove the screws from potentiometer bracket and pull it from the compression
device.
10. Loosen the clamp screw (1) on the end of the potentiometer shaft (4). Remove
the clamp and the sprocket (2) together.
11. Remove the hex nut (3) that secures the potentiometer to the mounting bracket
(5). Slide the potentiometer off the bracket.
12. To replace the Compression Thickness Potentiometer, reverse Steps 8 through
11 above. Do not tighten clamp screw at this time.
13. Perform the Compression Thickness Potentiometer Adjustment as described in
Chapter 4, Section 8.2, Compression Thickness Potentiometer Adjustment, p. 4-
62.
14. Reinstall the IRSD covers, the tubehead covers, the compression device
assembly upper and lower covers, the C-arm bottom cover and left side cover.
15. Reinstall the compression accessory. Restore power to system.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-59

Service Manual
3.4 IRSD Components

This section describes the removal and replacement procedures for the components inside
the Image Receptor Support Device (IRSD). The alignment, adjustment and/or calibration
procedures are provided as required.
3.4.1 Image Receptor Support Device Covers
To access the AEC board, the AEC detector board, image receptor detector board,
and the AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor, remove the IRSD covers
as follows (see Figure 6-39 throughout the following):
2. Loosen and remove the 4 screws (#2) that secure the black anodized top cover
(#1) to the aluminum top plate (#3).
3. Slide the cover forward and off the support and set it aside. Use care not to
scratch the top cover coating.
4. Loosen and remove the 6 screws (#4) that hold the aluminum top plate to the
receptor support frame.
5. Lift the aluminum top plate off the support. The AEC board, the AEC detector board,
and the image receptor detector board are mounted on the bottom of the plate.
6. The AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor is mounted on the IRSD
bottom plate.

1. Top Cover
2. Screws for Top Cover
3. Aluminum Top Plate
4. Screws for Top Plate
Figure 6-39: IRSD Covers—Removal
6-60 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.4.2 AEC Detector Assembly

The AEC Detector Assembly contains the AEC Detect board and is mounted
between the slide rails on the bottom side of the IRSD top plate. If the AEC Detect
board fails, replace the AEC Detector Assembly. Access to this component requires
removal of the IRSD covers.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the IRSD covers as described in Section 3.4.1, then
flip the top plate over to access the detector board.
2. Remove the D-sub connector from the rear of the sensor assembly.
3. Loosen and remove the two screws (one on either side) that secure the shroud
(Figure 6-40, #1) to the front of the slide rails. Pull the shroud off the slide rails.
4. Pull the AEC Sensor board (Figure 6-40, #2) out from between the slide rails
from the front.
5. To install the replacement AEC Sensor board, reverse these steps.
6. When complete, perform the procedures listed below before releasing the
system to the user:
• Chapter 4, Section 5.1, AEC Detector Gain Calibration, p. 4-20
• Chapter 4, Section 5.0, Automatic Exposure Control System Calibration, p.
4-19
• Chapter 4, Section 6.10, IRSD Leakage Test, p. 4-46
Figure 6-40: AEC Sensor Assembly—Removal

1. Shroud
2. AEC Sensor Board
P/N 9-500-0255 6-61

Service Manual
3.4.3 AEC Position Detect Board

The AEC Position Detect board (Figure 6-41, #1) is mounted to the AEC Sensor slide
rail on the bottom side of the IRSD top plate. Access to this component requires
2. Remove the IRSD covers as described in Section 3.4.1, then flip the aluminum
top plate over to access the detector board.
3. Remove the wiring harness from the AEC Position Detect board.
4. Loosen and remove the two screws that secure the board to the AEC sensor slide
rail. Lift the board off the slide rail.
5. To install the replacement AEC Position Detect board, reverse these steps.
7. Slide the AEC sensor to all seven detent positions.
8. Verify that for each detent, the corresponding LED on the compression device
display lights.
9. To install the replacement AEC Sensor board, reverse these steps.
system to the user:
4-19
11. When complete, turn the system off, then reassemble the IRSD and reinstall the
covers.
Figure 6-41: Position Detect and Accessory Detect Boards—Removal

1. AEC Position Detect Board
2. Accessory Detect Board
6-62 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
3.4.4 Accessory Detect Board

The Accessory Detect board (Figure 6-41, #2) is mounted to the bottom side of the
IRSD top plate. Access to this component requires removal of the IRSD covers.
1. Turn the system off. Remove the IRSD covers as described in Section 3.4.1, then
flip the aluminum top plate over to access the detector board.
2. Remove the wiring harness from the connector on the detector board.
3. Loosen and remove the 4 screws that secure the board to the standoffs. Lift the
board off the top plate.
4. To install the replacement Accessory Detector board, reverse these steps.
5. Set the top plate onto the IRSD frame, then turn the system on and enter the Run
Mode. Use the Image Receptor Phantom Tool (PN 9-060-0403) or reflective
tape to block the detectors according to the reference table in Appendix B
(Table B-19). Verify that the image receptor status on the LCD display changes
appropriately.
system to the user:
7. When complete, turn the system off, then re-assemble the IRSD and reinstall the
covers.
3.4.5 AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor Board

The AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor Board (Figure 6-42) is
mounted to the inside of the IRSD bottom plate. Access to this component requires
Figure 6-42: AEC Position Comp. Display Microprocessor—Removal
1. Turn the system off. Remove the IRSD covers as described in Section 3.4.1. To
replace the board, go to Step 3.
P/N 9-500-0255 6-63

Service Manual
2. If you are only replacing the software (Figure 6-42, #1), see Figure 6-43 and
remove and replace the chip. Reinstall the IRSD covers and go to Step 6.
Figure 6-43: Microprocessor Firmware Chip—Replacement
3. Disconnect all cables and ground wires to the AEC Position Compression
Display Microprocessor Board (Figure 6-42).
4. Remove the four nuts securing the board to the IRSD bottom plate.
5. To install the replacement AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor
Board, reverse these steps.
system to the user:
4-19
6-64 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Chapter 7: Parts List
Instructions
1.0 Instructions
This Chapter of the manual provides tabular listings of the serviceable components for the
Affinity. Part numbers and descriptions are provided for component identification.
1.1 The Replacement Parts Lists

The Affinity Parts Lists are:
• Table 7-1: Gantry Cover, Control Panel and Internal Components—Parts List
• Table 7-2: Gantry Left and Right-Side Components—Parts List
• Table 7-4: C-Arm Tubehead Components—Parts List
• Table 7-5: C-Arm Compression Device Components—Parts List
• Table 7-6: C-Arm Image Receptor Support Device—Parts List
• Table 7-7: Accessories for the Affinity—Parts List (Lists accessories, optional equipment,
tools and supplies required.)
The replacement parts lists are divided into four parts as follows:
• Part Number: this is the order number for the part. Service Support requires this number
when placing an order.
• Description: identifies the part by name.
• Figure #/Item #: identifies the Figure within the Service Manual that shows the
component location within the system. The Item number is given when applicable.
• Refer To: identifies the Chapter and Section within the Service Manual to go to for
installation or remove and replace procedures for that part.
Table 7-1: Gantry Cover, Control Panel and Internal Components—Parts List
Part Number Description Fig.#/Item # Refer To

1-003-0360 Assy, C-Arm Rotation Angle Display Figure 6-1, #6 Chapter 6, Section 2.2.1
1-700-0107 Assy, Emergency OFF Switch Figure 6-1, #2 Chapter 6, Section 2.2.2
3-000-5071 Assy, Power Distribution Figure 6-3, #3 Chapter 6, Section 2.1.4
3-000-5058 Assy, Control Unit Figure 6-6 Chapter 6, Section 2.3
1-003-0428 Assy, Display Microprocessor PCB Figure 6-6, #1 Chapter 6, Section 2.3.1
(part of Control Panel, Figure 6-1, #7)
1-510-0022 LCD Display Figure 6-6, #2 Chapter 6, Section 2.3.3
(part of Control Panel, Figure 6-1, #7)
1-070-5026 Circuit Breaker Dual 20A 25 Figure 6-1, #9 Chapter 6, Section 2.6.1
1-700-0018 C-Arm Angle Detent Microswitch Figure 6-1, #8 Chapter 6, Section 2.6.2
1-195-3058 C-Arm Rotation Potentiometer Figure 6-1, #13 Chapter 6, Section 2.6.3
(Potentiometer WW 10 T 5 K Ohm)
2-230-4002 Belt, Timing 3/32 x 32 Pitch Figure 6-12, #3 Chapter 6, Section 2.6.3
3-000-5072 Assy, Actuator Figure 6-1, #10 Chapter 6, Section 2.6.4
P/N 9-500-0255 7-1

Service Manual
Instructions
Table 7-2: Gantry Left and Right-Side Components—Parts List

3-000-5074 Assy, High Voltage Generator Figure 6-1, #12 Chapter 6, Section 2.4.1
1-003-0445 Assy, Power Control PCB Figure 6-1, #14 Chapter 6, Section 2.4.2
1-003-0489 Assy, Auxiliary Power Distribution PCB Figure 6-1, #15 Chapter 6, Section 2.4.3
1-003-0493 Assy, Host Microprocessor Bd Figure 6-1, #1 Chapter 6, Section 2.5.1
1-003-0434 Assy, Communications Interface Bd Figure 6-1, #3 Chapter 6, Section 2.5.2
1-451-5037 Power Supply, Open Frame Figure 6-1, #4 Chapter 6, Section 2.5.3
(Low Voltage Power Supply)
1-003-0440 Assy, C-Arm Safety Microprocessor Bd Figure 6-1, #5 Chapter 6, Section 2.5.4
Table 7-3: C-Arm Frame Components—Parts List

3-405-7071 Patient Face Shield Figure 6-15, #3 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.1
1-003-0289 Assy, Filament Protect PCB Figure 6-15, #2 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.3
3-000-5029 Assy, Top Cover 3 Position Switch Figure 6-20, #8 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.2
1-092-0028 Keyboard, Membrane 1x3 Figure 6-15, #8 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.4
1-092-0024 Keyboard, Membrane 2x3 Upper Left Figure 6-15, #5 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.5
(with LEDs)
1-092-0026 Keyboard, Membrane 2x3 Lower Left Figure 6-15, #5 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.5
1-092-0025 Keyboard, Membrane 2x3 Upper Right Figure 6-15* Chapter 6, Section 3.1.5
(with LEDs)
1-092-0027 Keyboard, Membrane 2x3 Lower Right Figure 6-15* Chapter 6, Section 3.1.5
1-003-0436 Assy, Switch Interface PCB Figure 6-15, #7 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.6
1-003-0095 Assy, MAG Tray Detect PCB Figure 6-15, #6 Chapter 6, Section 3.1.7
(Assy, C-Arm Accessory Detect PCB)
* Right side of Frame not shown in Figure 6-15.
Table 7-4: C-Arm Tubehead Components—Parts List

2-425-0042 X-Ray Tube Varian IM-113R Figure 6-16, #8 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.2
1-003-0403 Assy, Tubehead Control PCB Figure 6-16, #2 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.3
3-000-5056 Assy, Fan, C-Arm Cooling Figure 6-16, #10 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.4
9-400-0268 Kit, Beam Limiting Figure 6-16, #3—#7 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.5
1-003-0378 Assy, Fixed Aperture Detect Board Figure 6-16, #7 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.6
(part of Beam Limiting Assy)
3-000-4600 Filter Shifter Assy Figure 6-16, #6 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.7
3-000-5082 Lamp Shifter Assy Figure 6-16, #3 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.8
1-080-0008 Lamp (Replacement lamp-Light Field Lamp Assy) N/A Chapter 6, Section 3.2.9
3-000-3230 Assy, Lamp Fan Figure 6-30, #4 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.10
(part of Light Field Lamp Assy)
3-000-5081 Mirror Shifter Assy Figure 6-16, #5 Chapter 6, Section 3.2.11
7-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Instructions
Table 7-5: C-Arm Compression Device Components—Parts List

3-000-5067 Assy, Compression Motor Brake Figure 6-17, #1 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.2
See Below Assy, Compression Clutch and Clutch Figure 6-17, #6 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.3
Brake
3-460-0055 Shaft, Clutch Figure 6-35, #1 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.3
4-000-0132 Assy, Brake Magnet and Suppressor Figure 6-35, #2 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.3
2-480-0525 Spacer Round 12 x .75 LG Figure 6-35, #3 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.3
2-155-0006 Clutch, Slip, Comp Dev Figure 6-35, #4 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.3
3-251-0026 Compression Knob (Qty 2) Figure 6-35, #5 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.3
1-003-0472 Assy, AEC Pos. Comp. Display Bd (right) Figure 6-17, #7 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.5
1-003-0473 Assy, AEC Pos. Comp. Display Bd (left) Figure 6-17, #7 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.5
1-003-0103 Assy, Comp. Tray Sensor PCB Figure 6-17, #5 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.6
1-195-3058 Compression Thickness Potentiometer Figure 6-17, #3 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.7
(Potentiometer WW 10 T 5 K Ohm)
3-230-4002 Belt, Timing, 24 inch Figure 6-17, #2 Chapter 6, Section 3.3.7
Table 7-6: C-Arm Image Receptor Support Device—Parts List

3-000-5069 Assy, AEC Detector Figure 6-18, #3 Chapter 6, Section 3.4.2
1-003-0364 Assy, AEC Position Detect PCB Figure 6-18, #2 Chapter 6, Section 3.4.3
1-003-0365 Assy, AEC Accessory Detect PCB Figure 6-18, #4 Chapter 6, Section 3.4.4
1-003-0471 Assy, AEC Position Microprocessor Bd Figure 6-18, #1 Chapter 6, Section 3.4.5
Table 7-7: Accessories for the Affinity—Parts List

9-800-0040 Affinity Manual Package N/A N/A
8-005-0007 AutoFilm I.D. N/A AutoFilm I.D. User’s Guide
(PN 9-500-0078)
8-005-0008 Rapid I.D. N/A Rapid I.D. User’s Guide
(PN 9-500-0300)
9-400-0273 X-ray Footswitch Figure 3-1, #5 Chapter 2, Section 3.6.1
3-000-5020 Assy, Footswitch, Dual Function Figure 1-2, #7 Chapter 2, Section 3.6.2
9-400-0242 Kit, Operator Shield Figure 1-2, #5 Chapter 2, Section 3.8.1
3-405-8010 Template, Light/X-ray Field Figure 4-17 Chapter 4, Section 7.1
9-060-0403 Tool, Affinity Image Receptor Phantom N/A Chapter 4, Section 7.4
9-060-0173 Tool, Light Field Alignment Bars N/A Chapter 4, Section 7.10
9-061-0107 Tool, Field Service Belt Adj. N/A Chapter 4, Section 8.2
2-580-0506 Loctite, 242 Blue N/A Chapter 4, Section 8.2
3-000-5084 Aperture, Auto Figure 4-19, #1 Chapter 4, Section 7.3
P/N 9-500-0255 7-3

Service Manual
Instructions
Table 7-7: Accessories for the Affinity—Parts List

3-000-5086 Aperture, 7.5 cm Spot Contact Figure 4-19, #2 Chapter 4, Section 7.3
3-000-5088 Aperture, 10 cm Coned-down Contact Figure 4-19, #3 Chapter 4, Section 7.3
3-000-5087 Aperture, 7.5 cm Spot Magnification Figure 4-19, #4 Chapter 4, Section 7.3
3-000-5085 Aperture, Mag Full Field Figure 4-19, #5 Chapter 4, Section 7.3
2-425-3020 View Markers N/A N/A
MME-00271 Speciality Kit of 14 View Markers N/A N/A
ASY-00530 Crosshair Mount Assembly N/A N/A
9-400-0241 Localization Package N/A N/A
ASY-00717 Integrated Bucky Markers 18 x 24 cm Bucky N/A N/A
ASY-000718 Integrated Bucky Markers 24 x 30 cm Bucky N/A N/A
3-000-3121 Bucky, 18 x 24 cm N/A N/A
Front Load Cassette Holder
4-000-0241 Bucky, 18 x 24 cm HTC Bucky N/A N/A
4-000-0242 Bucky, 18 x 24 cm SRL 2000 Grid System N/A N/A
4-000-0243 Bucky, 24 x 30 cm HTC Bucky N/A N/A
4-000-0244 Bucky, 24 x 30 cm SRL 2000 Grid System N/A N/A
3-000-4571 Paddle, 24 x 30 cm Standard N/A N/A
3-000-4572 Paddle, 18 x 24 cm Standard N/A N/A
3-000-4579 Paddle, 10 cm Contact/Magnification N/A N/A
3-000-4580 Paddle, 10 cm Perforated Localization N/A N/A
3-000-4581 Paddle, 15 cm Perforated Localization N/A N/A
3-000-4582 Paddle, 15 cm Contact/Magnification N/A N/A
3-000-4583 Paddle, 7.5 cm Spot Contact/Magnification N/A N/A
3-000-4584 Paddle, 10 cm Localization Open N/A N/A
3-000-4585 Paddle, 15 cm Localization Open N/A N/A
3-000-4603 Paddle, 24 x 30 cm FAST N/A N/A
3-000-4604 Paddle, 18 x 24 cm FAST N/A N/A
3-000-5080 Paddle, 15cm Ultrasound N/A N/A
ASY-01017 Paddle, Small Breast w/Screen N/A N/A
3-000-5091 Table, Magnification N/A N/A
3-000-4594 Platform, Magnification N/A N/A
9-400-0236 Kit, Cables, Printer N/A Chapter 2, page 2-12
9-400-0278 Kit, Control Panel, Remote Figure 2-5 Chapter 2, Section 3.4.2
7-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
System Requirements and Dimensions
1.0 System Requirements and Dimensions

1.1 Electrical Input
Mains Voltage 200 VAC, 208 VAC, 220 VAC, 230 VAC, or 240 VAC
nominal ±10% (tap selectable at installation), 50 or 60
Hz, 1 phase with separate neutral and ground,
permanently connected
Mains Impedance Maximum line impedance not to exceed 0.20 Ohms for
200 VAC input voltage, and 0.25 Ohms for all other
specified input voltages
Max. Power Consumption 7.75 kVA for 5 seconds duration
Standby Current 0.5 kVA nominal
Maximum Line Current 35 Amps for 5 seconds
Circuit Breaker Rating 20 Amps. Time delay curve allows for inrush currents
(200% overload for 7 seconds).
Maximum Cycle Rate Full load 5 seconds on; 20 +1.5 seconds off
1.2 Operating Environment

Temperature Range 10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F), IEC 60601-1
Relative Humidity Range 30% to 75% non-condensing, IEC 60601-1
ESD Susceptibility Level of 3 kV for contact discharge to conductive
accessible parts that are not grounded. A level of 8 kV
for air discharge to all accessible parts. IEC 60601-1-2
EMI Susceptibility System is immune from levels of 1 v/m for the frequency
range of 26 MHz to 1 GHz. IEC 60601-1-2
EMI Generation Limits System complies with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-
2 for conducted and radiated emission.
Input Line Surge, fast transient/burst, lightning, IEC 60601-1-2
Maximum Heat Dissipation 1700 BTU/Hour in stand-by
1.3 Storage Environment

Temperature Range -25° C to +60° C (-13° F to +140° F). Requires labeling
on shipping container.
Humidity Zero to 95% humidity (non-condensing); not packaged
for outdoor storage.
P/N 9-500-0255 A-1

Service Manual
System Requirements and Dimensions
1.4 Room Requirements

The exam room containing the Affinity mammography system must meet all local, state, and
federal requirements for conducting X-ray examinations. In addition, the exam room should
provide:
• Ample space for patient, operator, and C-arm maneuvering
• Accessory storage area
• Adequate ventilation and cooling for both equipment and occupants
1.5 System Dimensions

Height 178 cm ±2 cm (70 inches)
Width 67 cm ±2 cm (26.4 inches)
Depth 109 cm ±2 cm (43 inches) including C-arm
Weight 267.2 kg ±10 kg (588 lb)
Radiation Shield 185 cm x 60 cm (73 inches x 24 inches) provides
minimum of 0.5 mm of lead attenuation at 35 kV
Figure A-1: System Dimensions
A-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
C-arm, Compression, and IRSD
2.0 C-arm, Compression, and IRSD

2.1 C-arm
C-arm Rotation Manual; ccw (+) 195° to 205°, cw (-) 145° to 155°;
detents at every 45°
Rotation Lock Electromagnetic, fail-safe
Vertical Travel (minimum) 71 to 140 cm (28 to 55 inches) from Bucky surface to
floor for C-arm at 0°
Alignment—Focal Spot, Compression Device and Image Receptor
The focal spot of the X-ray tube is located such that the
ray falling on the edge of the image receptor closest to
the chest wall is perpendicular to the image receptor.
The system allows the plane formed by the focal spot
and the chest wall of the device to be perpendicular to
that ray, and the motion of the compression device
provides essentially parallel compression of the breast
with respect to the plane of the image receptor.
Source to Image Distance (SID) 64.6 cm ±0.5 cm from the nominal position of the large
focal spot to the image receptor (film) located in the
Bucky
C-arm Functions Vertical drive, rotation, compression function,
compression release, light field, etc., are simultaneously
operable. Compression up and down is also controlled
by footswitches.
2.2 Compression
Manual Compression Force Limited to a maximum 300 N, +0/-88 N (67.4 lb, +0/-20
lb) between -150° through 0° to +150° of C-arm
rotation. It is not less than 150 N (33.7 lb) at all other
angles.
Motorized Compression Force User Selectable for either Full or Pre Compression
modes in User Defaults. 66 N to 178 N (15 lb to 40 lb),
user-selected within this range. Factory default of 132 N
(30 lb).
Full Compression User adjustable with a nominal range of 111 N
minimum to 178 N maximum (25 lbs minimum to 40
lbs maximum).
Pre Compression User adjustable with a nominal range of 66 N minimum
to 132 N maximum (15lbs minimum to 30 lbs
maximum).
Motorized Compression Activation Motorized Up/Down controls on both sides of the C-
arm and on the dual function footswitch.
Manual Release Manual Up/Down handwheel controls on both sides of
the Compression Device.
P/N 9-500-0255 A-3

Service Manual
C-arm, Compression, and IRSD
Compression Release Motorized release controlled by push buttons on both

sides of the C-arm and on the Control Panel. Automatic
release of the compression device can be enabled by
the user through software, which releases the
compression device at the end of the X-ray exposure.
All compression release functions are disabled when a
localization paddle is installed. Release is motor driven.
Automatic Compression Release Moves the compression device a distance of 10 cm +1
cm and is limited to 3.0 +1.0 seconds of travel duration
when the available travel is less than 10 cm.
Compression Force Display LED on Compression Device Cover shows the
compression force in increments of 4.5 N (1 lb),
rounded to the nearest integer.
Back Drive After Compression Does not exceed 1.5 mm in either motorized or manual
drive modes between -90°, 0, and +90°, and no greater
than 3 mm at all other positions.
C-arm Movement C-arm movement is locked out when greater than 50 N
(12 lb) of compression force is applied.
Compression Thickness Measurement and Display
Thickness is measured between 0 and 15 cm above the
breast support. The Display compensates for the type of
Image Receptor installed. The compression display is
angled and visible from both sides of patient.
Compression Thickness Accuracy ±0.5 cm between 0.5 cm and 15 cm at 132 N (30 lb)
compression force. The measurement is reproducible
within +2 mm of the displayed value. Compression
thickness is displayed on the compression device and is
angled and visible from both sides of patient.
2.3 Image Receptor Support Device

Image Receptor Support Device Contains sensors for accessory detection and a 3-cell
automatic exposure control detector, movable to seven
positions in 1.7 cm increments. The Image Receptor
Support Device limits X-ray transmission to less than or
equal to 0.1 mR for the maximum exposure. Complies
with 21 CFR, section 1020.31, and meets the 1 mGy per
exposure as defined by IEC 60601-1-3, section
29.207.2.
A-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
X-ray System
3.0 X-ray System

3.1 Automatic Exposure Control
AEC Detector Configured with three 1 cm square sensors configured
in a “D” shaped pattern with the center sensor 8 mm
forward of the outer two.
Detector Positioning The detector is centered laterally in the IRSD and may
be moved forward or rearward to one of 7 detent
locations. Position #1 is 1.5 cm from the chest wall,
increments at 1.7 cm intervals from position #1. Total
movement of 10.2 cm.
AEC Detector Position Indication The detent position of the sensor is displayed on the
corresponding LED (7 LEDs) on the AEC Position
Indicator on the upper compression device cover.
kV and Thickness Tracking AEC compensates for kV between 20 kV and 39 kV, and
for breast thickness between 2 cm and 6 cm (at
appropriate clinical kV) to produce optical densities
within 0.15 OD from the mean Optical Density.
Exposure Termination The AEC system can determine if the exposure will
reach the back-up-time in which case the exposure is
terminated within one of the following limits:
55 max milliseconds (maximum of 110 ms when in
Auto-kV or Auto-Filter modes)
5.25 max mAs (maximum of 10.5 mAs when in Auto-kV
or Auto-Filter modes)
An entrance exposure to the ACR MAP phantom of less
than 60 mR (160 mR when in Auto-kV or Auto-Filter
modes)
Indication is made to the operator, and a manual reset is
required to continue the exam.
Density Adjustment Steps The 11 density adjustment steps -5 to +5 in adjustable
steps of 6%, 8%, 10%, or 12.5% (Tolerance ±5%,
Factory default at 10%) provide a difference in mAs
from the adjacent step. These are field selectable at
installation.
3.1.1 AEC Mode Operating Range
Table A-1: AEC Mode Operating Ranges
Mode kV mAs
Auto-Time 20 to 39 kV 5 to 500 mAs
Auto-kV 25 to 30 kV 5 to 500 mAs
Auto-Filter 25 to 32 kV 5 to 500 mAs
P/N 9-500-0255 A-5

Service Manual
X-ray System
3.2 HV Generator (in compliance with IEC 60601-2-7)

Output Rating 3.2 kilowatt isowatt, minimum (100 mA @ 32 kV) at all
loading times.
Ripple Typically no greater than 2% with a maximum of 4% at
lower output loads (less than 2.2 kW) and at high and
low line voltages.
Topology Pulse-width-modulated High Frequency, active servo-
controlled. Dual Use of Inverter for HV generation and
for Rotor Supply
Timer An interval timer is used for the manual timing as well
as for the back-up-timer. There is an additional
hardware safety timer used to limit the maximum
exposure time to 6.5 seconds.
Manual mAs Range Small Focus: 3 through 150 mAs in 41 increments. 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30,
32.5, 35, 37.5, 40, 42.5, 45, 47.5, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70,
75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, and 150
mAs.
Large Focus: 3 through 500 mAs in 59 increments. 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30,
32.5, 35, 37.5, 40, 42.5, 45, 47.5, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70,
75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,
170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 325, 350,
375, 400, 425, 450, 475, and 500 mAs.
Reproducibility 0.05 coefficient of variation for 10 consecutive
exposures, per 21CFR, 1020.31. Internal limit = 0.04.
Linearity Radiation output versus selected mAs is less than 0.10
for adjacent mAs selections as follows: (X1-X2) equal to
less than 0.10 (X1 + X2) where X1 and X2 are average
mR/mAs values for consecutive exposures, per 21CFR,
1020.31. Internal limit = 0.09.
kV Accuracy The actual value does not differ by more than +1 kV
from the indicated value.
mAs Accuracy ±5% or ±2mAs, whichever is greater, from indicated,
measured in the ground side of the tube circuit.
Post mAs Accuracy ±5% or ±2mAs, whichever is greater, from actual mAs
mA Accuracy The actual value does not differ by more than +5% for
the indicated value.
A-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
X-ray System
Table A-2: kV Versus mA Table
kV Large Focus Large Focus Small Focus

Reduced mA
20 75 20 20
21 80 22 22
22 85 24 24
23 90 26 26
24 95 28 28
25 100 30 30
26 100 30 30
27 100 30 30
28 100 30 30
29 100 30 30
30 100 30 30
31 100 30 30
32 100 30 30
33 85 28 28
34 80 28 28
35 80 26 26
36 75 26 26
37 75 26 26
38 70 24 24
39 70 24 24
P/N 9-500-0255 A-7

Service Manual
X-ray System
3.3 Modes of Operation

Manual Exposure Mode kV, Filter, and mAs are user selectable.
Auto-Time Exposure Mode kV, Filter, and density are the only user-selectable
factors. The exposure terminates at a value of mAs
determined by the AEC algorithm to yield an optical
density to which the system has been calibrated. Post
mAs values display indicates the actual mAs value at the
termination of the exposure and remains displayed until
initiation of the next exposure. This mode is valid with
either the Molybdenum or Rhodium filter selected. The
exposure mAs may be modified up to ± 80% by
incrementing or decrementing the DENSITY function. If
determination is made during the AEC sample period
(first 50 ms) that the exposure will exceed the “Back-
Up-Time”, the exposure terminates in less than one of
the limits specified in the Exposure Termination section.
Auto-kV Exposure Mode
SRL 2000 Bucky Operation When this mode, along with the Molybdenum filter, is
selected, the kV will default to 25 kV or 26 kV as set
upon installation. The starting kV may be changed by the
operator to either value. When the Rhodium filter is
selected, the kV defaults to 28 kV. Upon exposure
initiation, the AEC signal is sampled and the kV may be
incremented upward to a maximum value of 30 kV if the
Molybdenum filter is selected, or 32 kV if the Rhodium
filter is selected. The exposure will be terminated at a
mAs value near one of the selected mAs windows (125
mAs, 165 mAs, 200 mAs, or the AUTOmatic 200 mrad
window), selectable by the operator. The final kV and
post-mAs is displayed after exposure termination.
HTC Bucky Operation When this mode and the Molybdenum filter are selected,
kV defaults to a value determined by the Compression
Height Threshold setting. The kV defaults to 24 kV for a
compression height value less than one-half of the
compression height threshold, or to 25 kV for
compression height values above one-half of the
compression height threshold. When the Rhodium filter
is selected, kV defaults to 28 kV. The exposure terminates
at a mAs value near the selected mAs windows (125
mAs, 165 mAs, 200 mAs, or the AUTOmatic 200 mrad
window for Large Focal Spot or 38 mAs, 50 mAs, 60 mAs
for Small Focal Spot or reduced mA operation),
selectable by the operator. The final kV and post mAs is
displayed after exposure termination.
Auto-Filter This mode provides full automatic operation of all
technique factors. The starting kV values are as listed
above in Auto-kV. Upon exposure initiation, the AEC
signal is sampled to determine if the kV needs to be
incremented upward to provide an exposure within the
200 mAs window, or the 200 mrad window. When
determined by the Auto-Filter algorithm, the exposure is
momentarily interrupted and the Rhodium filter moves
into the beam in place of the Molybdenum filter. After
the kV or kV/filter is selected by the algorithm, the Auto-
Time function completes the exposure. The final kV, post-
mAs, and Filter is displayed after exposure termination.
A-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
X-ray System
3.4 X-ray Source, Filtration, and Collimation

X-ray Tube Varian Integral M113 series or equivalent
Focal Spot Size Per IEC 336-Measurement of X-ray tube focal spots
Large—0.3 mm, nominal
Small—0.1 mm, nominal
Tube Voltage 20 kV to 39 kV
Tube Current (High speed operation)
Large focus—100 mA minimum between 25 kV and 32
kV
Small focus—30 mA minimum between 25 kV and 32
kV
Thermal Characteristics (Reference Only) Anode Heat Storage Capacity—210 kJ (300 kHU)
Maximum Anode Heat Dissipation Rate—60 kHU/
minute
Housing Heat Storage Capacity—370 kJ (500 kHU)
Maximum Housing Heat Dissipation Rate—100 Watts
(135 HU/s) free air convection
Anode Rotation High speed operation (9600 rpm minimum)
Anode Angle Large Focus: 16° target angle
Small Focus: 10° target angle

Anode Material Molybdenum
X-ray Window Beryllium, 0.8 mm thickness max.
Maximum Temperature,
Tube Housing Surface 85° C (185° F)
Tubehead Cover Surface 41° C (105° F)
Over-Temperature Protection Sensor Internally provided in series with Stator common. NC
10 Amp @240 VAC, open @ 79.4° C (174.9° F), close @
68.3° C (154.9° F)
Safety Class IEC 60601-2-28
X-ray Tube Head Cooling A fan is provided to maintain a tube housing
temperature of no greater than 85° C (185° F) with an
ambient temperature of 25° C (77° F). A fan is provided
to keep the lamp housing at a temperature no greater
than 65° C (149° F).
Added Filtration The system provides a 30 micron (0.03 mm)
Molybdenum foil filter and a 25 micron (0.025 mm)
Rhodium foil filter. The filter movement is automatic
and has position sensors for use as X-ray interlock.
Beam Quality With the Compression Paddle in the X-ray beam, the
HVL for Mo/Mo operation is equal to or greater than kV/
100 +0.03 mm Al but less than kV/100 +0.12 mm Al.
For Mo/Rh, minimum value of > kV/100 +0.03, Max <
kV/100 +0.19 mm Al.
P/N 9-500-0255 A-9

Service Manual
X-ray System
X-ray Collimation The system detects the attached image receptor and full
field collimation is provided by an auto-aperture
mechanism with additional fixed apertures for
magnification and reduced field operation. An aperture
detection system ensures that the correct aperture is
used with the installed image receptor. Exposures are
inhibited when improper combinations are detected.
The collimator has a beam-limiting device that allows
the entire chest wall edge of the X-ray field to extend
5 mm, +2.5 mm, beyond the edge of the Image
Receptor and provides a means to ensure the X-ray field
does not extend beyond any non-chest wall edge of the
Image Receptor of more than 2% of the SID.
Light Field to X-ray Field Congruency The light field that passes through the X-ray beam
limitation device is aligned with the X-ray field so that
the total of any misalignment of the edges of the light
field and the X-ray field along either the length or the
width of the visually defined field at the plain of the
breast support surface does not exceed 2% of the SID.
Light Field Lamp The lamp illuminates for 30 seconds ±5 seconds upon
pressing a Light Field Lamp Button on the C-arm, or by
pressing a Compression Down Button. The lamp
extinguishes automatically when X-ray exposure is
initiated. A shatter shield is provided.
Light Field Illuminance The light localizer has a minimum illuminance of 160
lux and meets all of the requirements of 21CFR, section
1020.31. The lamp voltage is the least amount required
to assure 160 lux at low line. A shatter shield surrounds
the lamp. Lamp is service adjustable to provide
alignment of the light field to the X-ray field.
Light Field Mirror The light field mirror is motor driven out of the X-ray
field within 1.0 sec of X-ray initiation signal. Position
sensors provide for X-ray interlock. The lamp position is
adjustable between large focal spot and small focal spot
to provide proper light field to X-ray field congruency
required for a bi-angle target X-ray tube.
A-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Accessories
4.0 Accessories
4.1 Compression Paddles
Compression Paddles The compression paddles are transparent and the full
field paddles are marked with the location of the AEC
sensor positions. These markings are not detectable on
film when imaged with 1 cm of acrylic attenuator at 22
kV to an Optical Density of 1.2 OD. The paddle
attenuation is less than 20% (reduction of mR/mAs) at
28 kV. The full field paddles are adjustable to provide
focal spot, compression device and image receptor
alignment requirements.
The compression paddles including the frame and
compression device maintain a parallel compression
and do not deflect by more than 1 cm difference from
any surface providing compression under maximum
motorized compression force (except for FAST paddles).
Compression Paddle Sizes Available paddles:
18 x 24 cm Full Field Contact
24 x 30 cm Full Field Contact
7.5 cm Spot Contact/Magnification
10 cm Contact/Magnification
10 cm Open (Rectangular) Localization
10 cm Perforated Localization
15 cm Contact/Magnification
15 cm Open (Rectangular) Localization
15 cm Perforated Localization
18 x 24 cm Full Field FAST Paddles
24 x 30 cm Full Field FAST Paddles
Ultrasound Paddle
Small Breast Paddle
The chest wall edge of the compression paddle does not
extend beyond the chest wall edge of the image
receptor by more than 1% of the SID when tested with
the compression paddle placed above the breast
support surface at a distance equivalent to standard
breast thickness. The shadow of the vertical edge of the
compression paddle is not visible on the image.
P/N 9-500-0255 A-11

Service Manual
Accessories
4.2 Apertures
There are five apertures for all combinations of paddles and receptors.
Auto-Aperture
7.5 cm Spot Contact
7.5 cm Spot Magnification
10 cm Coned
Magnification Full Field
4.3 Magnification
Magnification Factor 1.8 ±0.1 X (2.25 cm above the surface) for platform and
table devices
Material of breast support surface
Platform: Polycarbonate
Table: Carbon Fiber
Size of breast support surface 12 x 16.5 cm minimum to provide full 18 x 24 cm full
field magnification at 1.8X.
4.4 Image Receptors

Image Receptors The Image Receptor Support Device is designed to
accept the following receptors, which are inserted from
the front of the c-arm.
18 x 24 cm front load cassette holder (used with
magnification platform)
18 x 24 cm SRL 2000 Bucky
24 x 30 cm SRL 2000 Bucky
18 x 24 cm HTC Bucky
24 x 30 cm HTC Bucky
Magnification Table
Aluminum Equivalence The carbon fiber breast support surfaces of the Buckys
and the Magnification Table have an Aluminum
Equivalence of less than 0.3 mm.
A-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Appendix B: Technical References
Introduction
1.0 Introduction
This Appendix provides tables used for identifying test points, LED indications, fuse identification and
location, jumpers, and accessory identification sensor combinations (image receptors) in the Affinity
Series System.
2.0 Test Points

Warning: Service engineers must take appropriate radiation safety measures when testing (or
maintaining) the system.
Caution: Be aware of the damage static electricity can inflict on electronic components. Always wear a
grounded electrostatic discharge strap when handling static sensitive components.
Use the following test point tables as an aid for troubleshooting the Affinity.
• Table B-1: Filament Protect Board (PN 1-003-0289) Test Points, pg. B-1
• Table B-2: Power Control Board (PN 1-003-0445) Test Points, pg. B-2
• Table B-3: C-arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) Test Points, pg. B-2
• Table B-4: Display Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0428) Test Points, pg. B-3
• Table B-5: Tubehead Control Board (PN 1-003-0403) Test Points, pg. B-3
• Table B-6: AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor (PN 1-003-0471) Test Points, pg. B-3
• Table B-7: AEC Position Compression Display (PN 1-003-0472) Test Points, pg. B-4
• Table B-8: Auxiliary Power Distribution Board (PN 1-003-0489) Test Points, pg. B-4
• Table B-9: Communications Interface Board (PN 1-003-0434) Test Points, pg. B-4
• Table B-10: Host Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493), pg. B-5
• Table B-11: HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) Test Points, pg. B-6
Table B-1: Filament Protect Board (PN 1-003-0289) Test Points
Test Point Voltage/Signal Function

TP1 GRID -5 V factory set
TP2 MA 1 V = 100 mA
TP3 GND ---
TP4 SM 2.7 V to 5 V
TP5 LG 2.7 V to 5 V
P/N 9-500-0255 B-1

Service Manual
Test Points
Table B-2: Power Control Board (PN 1-003-0445) Test Points

TP1 Vref Active = 10.5 V
TP2 M+ Motor + = +11.7 V compression up;
-11.7 V compression down;
Reference to TP3
TP3 M- Motor - = -11.7 V compression up;
+11.7 V compression down;
Reference to TP2
TP5 Vcc +5 V
TP6 Sense Active = 200 mV
TP7 MGND ---
TP8 Vbb +13.6 V
TP9 VM +20 V
Table B-3: C-arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) Test Points
Test Point Voltage/Signal Test Point Voltage/Signal

TP1 Vref TP11 GND
TP2 Acc0 TP12 -12 V
TP3 Acc1 TP13 Vcc
TP4 Acc2 TP14 +5 V
TP5 Not Used TP15 -5 V
TP6 ACK OK TP16 TPY
TP7 DAC 1 TP17 TPX
TP8 DAC 0 TP18 Not Used
TP9 +5 V TP19 AGND
TP10 +12 V TP20 DGND
B-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Test Points
Table B-4: Display Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0428) Test Points
Test Point Voltage/Signal

TP1 GND
TP2 GND
TP3 +5 V Rtn
TP4 +5 V
TP5 Vcc
TP6 +12 V
TP7 Host TXD
TP8 Host RXD
TP9 X-Ray Switch 1
TP10 Host Out
TP11 Host In
TP12 R/W#
Table B-5: Tubehead Control Board (PN 1-003-0403) Test Points

TP1 VCC
TP2 GND
TP3 VBB
TP4 Mirror Motor 1
TP5 Lamp Motor 1
TP6 Aperture Motor 1
TP7 Filter Motor 1
TP8 Filter
TP9 Aperture
TP10 Lamp
TP11 Mirror
Table B-6: AEC Position Compression Display Microprocessor (PN 1-003-0471) Test Points

TP1 +5 V
TP2 DGND
TP3 AGND
TP4 +12 V
TP5 -12 V
TP6 VCC
P/N 9-500-0255 B-3

Service Manual
Test Points
Table B-7: AEC Position Compression Display (PN 1-003-0472) Test Points

TP1 +2.5 V +2.5 V
TP2 FORCE +0.25 V to +1.5 V
TP3 THICKNESS +0.05 V to +2 V
TP4 GND ---
Table B-8: Auxiliary Power Distribution Board (PN 1-003-0489) Test Points

TP1 +15 V Tubehead Motor
TP2 +24 V Bucky Power (Regulated)
TP3 -15 V StereoLoc II
TP4 +15 V StereoLoc II
TP5 +22 V Filament Power
TP6 DGND ---
TP7 -25 V Tube Control
TP8 +25 V Tube Control
TP9 +35 V Bucky Power (Unregulated)
Table B-9: Communications Interface Board (PN 1-003-0434) Test Points

TP1 GND
B-4 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Test Points
Table B-10: Host Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493)
Test Point Voltage/Signal Function Test Point Voltage/Signal Function

TP1 kV Control 0 V to +10 V TP27 C-Arm Rotation Angle Clock
Display Slave Select
TP2 KV Sense 0 V to +10 V TP28 C-Arm Rotation Angle Clock
Display Serial
TP3 mA Sense 0 V to +10 V TP29 MOSI2 Clock
TP4 HV Fault Passive = +5 V TP30 Grid in Motion Clock
Active = 0 V
TP5 Rotor Okay Active = +5 V TP31 Detent Active = +5 V
Passive = 0 V
TP6 HV Enable/Backup Active = +5 V TP32 +5 V ---
Timer Passive = 0 V
TP7 HV Reset Active = +5 V TP33 AEC 0 V to +10 V
Passive = 0 V
TP8 N/A --- TP34 Bucky Cassette Active = +5 V
Passive = 0 V
TP9 N/A --- TP35 Accessory Ready1 Passive = +5 V
Active = 0 V
TP10 AGND --- TP36 Tubehead Ready1 +5 V
TP11 N/A --- TP37 MISO2 Clock
TP12 DGND --- TP38 Grid in Motion 0 V to +5 V
TP13 N/A --- TP39 N/A ---
TP14 Compression Motor 0 V to +10.5 V TP40 X-ray Shield Interlock +5 V
Current
TP15 EL Drive 0 V to +130 V TP41 C-Arm Angle 0 V to +5 V
TP16 +5 V --- TP42 Collimator Lamp +5 V enabled
TP17 Filament Current 0 V to +10 V TP43 DGND ---
TP18 +5 V set to +5.2 V TP44 Compression Release +5 V enabled
TP19 DGND --- TP45 -12 V ---
TP20 N/A --- TP46 Rotation Release +5 V enabled
TP21 +5 V --- TP47 Compression Down +5 V enabled
TP22 Filament Sense 0 V to +10 V TP48 Compression Up +5 V enabled
TP23 Tubehead Slave Clock TP49 C-Arm Down +5 V enabled
Select
TP24 Accessory Slave Clock TP50 C-Arm Up +5 V enabled
Select
TP25 AGND --- TP51 +12 V ---
TP26 Read/Write Clock
P/N 9-500-0255 B-5

Service Manual
Test Points
Table B-11: HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) Test Points
Test Point Voltage/Signal Test Point Voltage/Signal Test Point Voltage/Signal

TP1 1 V=20 mA TP26 Grid Monitor TP51 KVS
IF-(scaled)
TP2 Tube Over Voltage TP27 Grid Over Voltage TP52 AGND
TP3 VF TOT +ADJ TP28 5.1 V TP53 Filament Low
TP4 +VF Over Voltage ADJ TP29 Rotor OK TP54 OC Fault
TP5 IF TP30 HS FREQ TP55 Tube Grid V
TP6 ARC ADJ TP31 GND TP56 Filament COM
TP7 ARC TP32 Filament Enable TP57 Filament IF
TP8 GND TP33 INV FREQ TP58 +15 V
TP9 VF+ TP34 HV Shut Down TP59 Filament FREQ
TP10 ICOM VTH TP35 DR AD TP60 Grid V
TP11 INV IS TP36 kV Control Return TP61 AGND
TP12 GND TP37 DR BC TP62 INV1
TP13 +5 V TP38 +12.5 V TP63 INV Drain
TP14 mAs TP39 VC TP64 INV Gate
TP15 Rotor OC ADJ TP40 HV Enable TP65 +22U
TP16 Filament Fault TP41 GND TP66 P+ 14 V
TP17 INV OC ADJ TP42 kV Control TP67 HV COM
TP18 HDGND TP43 Brake Relay TP68 -15 V
TP19 Over Current SET TP44 Brake Time TP69 Filament Return
TP20 Rotor IP TP45 Brake TP70 GND
TP21 ICOM Sense TP46 HV Fault TP71 LG OC SET
TP22 Filament Shut Down TP47 Boost Time TP72 SM OC SET
TP23 +2.5 V TP48 -VP Local TP73 LG GR SET
TP24 +22U RTN TP49 Over Voltage Fault TP74 SM GR SET
TP25 Over Voltage TP50 VC
B-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
LED Indicators
3.0 LED Indicators

Use the following LED Indicator tables as an aid for troubleshooting the Affinity.
• Table B-12: Tubehead Control Board (1-003-0403) LED Indicators, pg. B-7
• Table B-13: Display Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0428) LED Indicators, pg. B-7
• Table B-14: C-arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) LED Indicators, pg. B-7
• Table B-15: Relay Protection Board (PN 1-003-0490) LED Indicators, pg. B-7
• Table B-16: Host Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493) LED Indicators, pg. B-8
• Table B-17: Host Microprocessor Board—C-arm Switch Multiple Function Indicators, pg. B-8
• Table B-18: HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) LED Indicators, pg. B-8
Table B-12: Tubehead Control Board (1-003-0403) LED Indicators
LED LED “ON” Indication LED LED “ON” Indication

D1 Green = Run D9 Mirror Out
D2 Aperture 2 ID D10 Lamp Large
D3 Aperture 1 ID D11 Lamp Out
D4 Aperture 4 ID D12 Aperture IN
D5 Aperture 3 ID D13 Aperture OUT
D6 Green = Motor Fault D14 Filter Rhodium
D7 Red = Motor Over Current D15 Filter Molybdenum
D8 Mirror Large
Table B-13: Display Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0428) LED Indicators
LED LED “ON” Indication

D3 Software Activity
Table B-14: C-arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) LED Indicators
LED “ON”
LED LED “ON” Indication LED
Indication
D1 +5 V D6 ACC0
D2 Actuator Fault D7 ACC1
D3 Load Cell Fault (load cell at limit) D8 ACC2
D4 Clock signal (flickers to indicate board is working) D9 VCC
D5 CAL Mode Initiated D10 -5 V
Table B-15: Relay Protection Board (PN 1-003-0490) LED Indicators

D1 No power to Board
P/N 9-500-0255 B-7

Service Manual
LED Indicators
Table B-16: Host Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493) LED Indicators

D1 +5 V
D2 +12 V
D3 -12 V
D4 LED Serial CLK (Flickers when operating)
D5 C Angle (Flickers when operating)
D6 MOSI (Flickers when operating)
D7 COMP MISO (Flickers when operating)
D8 COMP SS (Flickers when operating)
D9 TUBE SS (Flickers when operating)
D15 Unit set to Large Focal Spot
D16 Unit in Boost mode
D17 Unit in BRAKE mode
D18 Unit in RUN mode
D19 Filament Enabled
D25 Rotation Brake Released
D26 Actuator Down
D27 Actuator Up
Table B-17: Host Microprocessor Board—C-arm Switch Multiple Function Indicators
C-Arm Switch Function D21 D22 D23 D24

Compression Release Active when: ON ON OFF OFF
Compression Down Active when: OFF ON OFF ON
Compression Up Active when ON ON OFF OFF
Compression Brake Engaged when OFF OFF ON ON
Table B-18: HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) LED Indicators
LED Color LED “ON” Indication LED Color LED “ON” Indication
D4 RED GRID D40 GRN R+ 14 V
D29 RED HV Interlock D41 GRN HV Enable
D30 RED INV Interlock D43 RED Rotor Over Current
D32 RED ARC D57 RED Tube Over Current
D33 RED INV Over Current D67 GRN Filament Enable
D35 RED Tube Over Voltage D68 GRN SM Focal Spot
D37 GRN -15 V D70 GRN LG Focal Spot
D38 GRN +5 V D71 RED Over Current
D39 GRN +15 V D75 RED Over Voltage
B-8 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Image Receptor Detect Board—Sensor Combinations
4.0 Image Receptor Detect Board—Sensor Combinations

A strip of tape, on the bottom of each image receptor, blocks the 4 optical sensors on the Accessory
Detect Board (see Figure 6-18, page 6-31 for component location and identification). The strip is
patterned using reflective and non-reflective material. Blocking an optical sensor with the reflective
material causes that sensor to generate a logic high signal; blocking it with the non-reflective material
causes the sensor to remain at a low logic.
The combination of these highs and lows generate the signals which are used to determine the installed
image receptor holder.
Use Table B-19 to verify the optical sensor combinations for each image receptor. Note that “H” signifies
a logic high (reflective: 3.5 - 5.0 VDC), while “L” signifies a logic low (non-reflective: 0.5 - 1.5 VDC).
Note that the fifth column in Table B-19 provides a graphic representation of the HEX code strip found on
each image receptor. The light boxes represent a logic high (reflective) while the dark boxes represent a
logic low (non-reflective). The number code given is the code which appears on the Debug Screen for the
individual image receptors (when installed).
Table B-19: Image Receptor Sensor Combinations
Image Receptor ISO4 ISO3 ISO2 ISO1 Hex Code

Mag Table H L L L
8=
18 x 24 cm Cassette Holder L H L L
4=
18 x 24 cm HTC Bucky L H H L
6=
24 x 30 cm HTC Bucky H H H L
E=
18 x 24 cm SRL 2000 Bucky H H L H
D=
24 x 30 cm SRL 2000 Bucky L L H H
3=
P/N 9-500-0255 B-9

Service Manual
Fuses
5.0 Fuses
Figure B-1, page B-11 (on the following page) shows the location of the fuses that are on the Affinity
Series Gantry circuit boards. One additional fuse is located on the Relay Protection Board (part of the
Input Power Assembly Chassis). Refer to Table B-20 for rating and part number information on the fuses.
Table B-20: Affinity Series Fuses
Fuse Location—Board Part Number Ref. Des. Description Part Number

Relay Protection Board—1-003-0490 F1 15 A 600 V FB 1-070-1114
Auxiliary Power Distribution Board—1-003-0489 F11, F20 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 3 A 1-070-1248
F16 CER MDA SB, 12 A 1-070-1327
F18, F19 SLO BLOW, 2 A, 250 V 1-070-1072
F14 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 0.50 A 1-070-1242
F1 - F4 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 5 A 1-070-1251
F5, F6, F10, 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 7 A 1-070-1252
F12, F13
F8 8 A Ceramic Body 1-070-1126
F9 3 AG SLO-BLOW, 7 A 250 V 1-070-1273
F7 CER MDA SB 15 A 1-070-1328
Communications Interface Board—1-003-0434 F2 - F15 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 1 A 1-070-1244
F1 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 2 A 1-070-1246
HV Generator Assembly—3-000-5074 F1
Power Control Board—1-003-0445 F6 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 2 A 1-070-1246
F2 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 3 A 1-070-1248
F4 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 5 A 1-070-1251
F1, F5 2 AG SLO-BLOW, 7 A 1-070-1252
F3 SLO-BLOW, 10 A 32 V 1-070-1084
B-10 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Fuses
Figure B-1: Fuse Location—Gantry
P/N 9-500-0255 B-11

Service Manual
Jumpers
6.0 Jumpers
The following tables show the Jumpers on the Affinity boards with the default (factory setting)
configuration. The jumpers should not be changed from the configuration shown unless directed to do so
during a test, or calibration procedure. Any time the jumper setting is changed, it must be returned to the
default position unless the change was made to establish new operating parameters.
• Table B-21: Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493) Jumper Settings
• Table B-22: Communications Interface Board (PN 1-003-0434) Jumper Settings
• Table B-23: C-Arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) Jumper Settings
• Table B-24: HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) Jumper Settings, pg. B-13
Table B-21: Microprocessor Board (PN 1-003-0493) Jumper Settings
Jumper Default Setting Function

Backup Timer Test
JP5 (See Chapter 4, Section 4.4, Backup Timer Test, p. 4-17.)
Backup Timer Test

JP6 (See Chapter 4, Section 4.4, Backup Timer Test, p. 4-17.)
Select X-Ray ON/Boost ON for X-ray ON Lamp Installation

JP7 (See Chapter 2, Section 3.3, Remote X-ray On/Power On
Light Connection, p. 2-6, for operational settings.)
Table B-22: Communications Interface Board (PN 1-003-0434) Jumper Settings
Jumper Default Setting
JP1
JP2
Table B-23: C-Arm Safety Board (PN 1-003-0440) Jumper Settings

Normal Operation
JP1
TP17 to TP16 Open Default setting is for normal operations.

Short TPs together to for C-Arm Safety Board
Calibration (See Chapter 4, Section 8.4, C-arm
Safety Microprocessor Board Calibration/Vertical
Drive Force Load Cell Setting, p. 4-63)
B-12 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Jumpers
Table B-24: HV Control Filament Board (PN 1-003-0485) Jumper Settings

J6 BRAKE TIME
To set the Brake Time, configure J6 as follows:
POSITION BRAKE TIME
5 1.5 sec
4 2.0 sec
3 2.5 sec
2 3.0 sec
1 3.5 sec
No Jumper 4.0 sec
Pos 1 to 2 4.0 sec
Pos 2 to 3 4.0 sec
Pos 3 to 4 4.0 sec
Pos 4 to 5 4.0 sec
Factory Default setting to Position 2 (as shown)
J7 kV OFFSET
(Jumper is installed for normal operations, refer to
Chapter 4, Section 9.0, kV Control Offset Calibration,
p. 4-64)
J8 GRID V
(Not Used, leave open)
P/N 9-500-0255 B-13

Service Manual
Jumpers
B-14 P/N 9-500-0255

Service Manual
Index
Index
Numerics AEC Detector Gain 4-20

10 cm Coned-down Contact Aperture Alignment 4-55 Automatic Exposure Control System 4-19
3-Position Switch Board 6-35 Compression Force 4-7
7.5 cm Spot Contact Aperture Alignment 4-55 Compression System 4-7
7.5 cm Spot Magnification Aperture Alignment 4-55 Compression Thickness 4-8
7-Position Switch Board 6-36 Compression Thickness Threshold 4-33
Exposure System 4-9
A Filament Current (mA) 4-12
Acronym and Abbreviation List P-xi HTC Factor (Offset) 4-31
AEC Initial Calibration
Calibrating 4-19 Large Focal Spot (Mo) 4-21
AEC Detector Gain 4-20 Large Focal Spot (Rh) 4-22
AEC Limits Performance Test 4-45 Small Focal Spot (Mo) 4-26
Affinity, Introduction 1-1 Small Focal Spot (Rh) 4-27
Alert Codes 5-11 kV Tracking
Alert Codes Log 5-10 Large Focal Spot (Mo) 4-22
Downloading 5-13 Large Focal Spot (Rh) 4-23
Auto-Aperture Alignment Small Focal Spot (Mo) 4-27
18 x 24 cm Large Focal Spot 4-53 Large Bucky (24 x 30 cm) Factor 4-32
24 x 30 cm Large Focal Spot 4-52 Starting AEC Values
Automatic Exposure Control 5-9 Large Focal Spot 4-23
Small Focal Spot 4-28
B Test mA 4-12
Backup Timer Tube Voltage 4-9
Test 4-17 Calibration Screens 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6
Time-out Signal 4-17 C-arm
Beam 6-29 Angle Detent Microswitch 6-23
Bucky Device Performance Test 4-44 Down button 3-5
Button Frame Covers 6-33, 6-34
C-arm Down Key 3-6 Rotation Potentiometer 6-2, 6-24
C-arm down Key 3-5 Rotation Release key 3-5, 3-6
C-arm Rotation Release 3-5, 3-6 Safety Function Test 4-35
C-arm Up Key 3-5, 3-6 Up Key 3-5
Compression Down 3-5 Vertical Drive Actuator 6-25
Compression Release 3-5 Certifiable Components 1-10
Compression Up 3-5 Compliance Data 1-9
Footswitch Controls 3-6 Compliance Statement 1-9
Light Field Lamp 3-5 Compression
Down Key 3-5
C Release button 3-5
Calibration Data, Downloading 5-13 Up Key 3-5
Calibration Data, Uploading 5-14 Compression Device Components 6-30
Calibration Mode Compression Force, Calibrating 4-7
entering 4-2 Compression Thickness, Calibrating 4-8
Calibration Procedures 4-1 Configuring
AEC Detect Board—R1 Adjustment 4-20 Input Power 2-4
Remote X-ray ON Light 2-7
P/N 9-500-0255 i
Service Manual
Index
Connecting Film Labeling Devices 2-12 C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board 6-21
Connecting Power Cable 2-5 Communications Interface Board 6-21
Control Panel 3-7 Host Microprocessor Board 6-18
Screens 3-8 Low Voltage Power Supply 6-21
Control Panel Installation 2-8
remote location 2-8 H
to Gantry 2-8 Half-Value Layer Test 4-36
Control Panel, description 1-8 High Voltage Generator Assembly 6-2
Controls and Indicators 3-1 High Voltage Generator Calibration Setup 4-10
Host Microprocessor Board 6-2
D
download/upload data 5-12 I
Downloading Alert Codes Log 5-13 Image Receptor Detect Board, Sensor Combinations
Downloading Calibration Data 5-13 B-9
Dual Function Footswitches, Installing 2-11 Indicators and Controls 3-1
Indicators, LED B-7
E Initial Startup Procedures 2-13
Electrical Safety 1-3 Input Power Configuration 2-4
Exposure Control 5-8 Installing
Exposure System, Calibrating 4-9 Control Panel 2-8
Exposure Technique Defaults to Gantry 2-8
Setting 3-15 Control Panel, remote location 2-8
External Indicators 1-5 Dual Function Footswitches 2-11
Operator Radiation Shield 2-14
F System 2-4
Filament Current (mA), Calibrating 4-12 System Accessories 2-10
Filament Protection Board 6-35 X-ray Footswitch 2-10
Filament Waveforms Pattern 4-13 Interlocks 1-5
Film Labeling Devices, Connecting 2-12 International Symbols P-x
Filter Indicator 3-5 Introduction to Affinity 1-1
Final Operational Setup 2-14 IRSD
Footswitch Components 6-31
Controls 3-6 Leakage Test 4-46
Functional Tests 3-1 Isolation Integrity 1-4
Fuses B-10
J
G Jumpers B-12
Gain Adjustment
Initial Calibration, Large Focal Spot K
Mo 4-21 kV Control Offset Calibration 4-64
Rh 4-22
Initial Calibration, Small Focal Spot L
Mo 4-26 Label Location 1-11
Rh 4-27 Leakage Test, IRSD 4-46
Gantry and C-arm, description 1-6 LED Indicators B-7
Gantry Components Light Field Alignment Test and Adjustment 4-56
Auxiliary Power Distribution Board 6-17 Large Focal Spot 4-56
Firmware Chip 6-20 Small Focal Spot 4-57
HV Generator Assembly Light Field Edge Contrast Test 4-58
Removal 6-16 Light Field Illuminance Test 4-59
Power Control Board 6-17 Light Field Lamp 3-5
Right Location of Labels 1-11
Calibration Storage Battery 6-19 Low Voltage Power Supply 6-2
ii P/N 9-500-0255
Service Manual
Index
M Power On Light Connection 2-6

Pre-Startup Inspections 3-2
Magnification Full Field (18 x 24 cm) Aperture
Preventive Maintenance 5-1
Alignment 4-54
Main Circuit Breaker 6-2, 6-22 R
Maintenance
Radiation Safety 1-4
Alert Codes Log 5-10
Receiving Instructions 2-2
Remove and Replace Procedures 6-1
Remote X-ray On Connection 2-6
System Data Retrieval 5-12
Remote X-ray ON Light Configuration 2-7
Maintenance, Preventive 5-1
Remove and Replace
C-arm Components 6-28
C-arm Safety Microprocessor Board Calibration/
Compression Assembly 6-51
Vertical Drive Force Load Cell Setting
Frame Components 6-32
4-63
IRSD 6-60
Compression Chain Tension 4-61
Tubehead 6-39
Compression Force Load Cell 4-63
Gantry Components 6-2
Compression Thickness Potentiometer 4-62
Control Panel Components 6-9
Mechanical Functions 5-7
Cover Components 6-3, 6-7
Mechanical Safety 1-4
Internal 6-22
O Left-Side 6-12
Right Side 6-18
Offset Adjustment
Remove and Replace Procedures 6-1
Initial Calibration Small Focal Spot
Removing Covers
Mo 4-26
Gantry 6-3
Rh 4-28
Left and Right Side Panels 6-4
On/Off switch 3-3
Lower Rear Panel/Power Dist Assembly 6-6
Operational Parameters, Setting 2-13
Rear Connector Panel 6-5
Operational Setup, Final 2-14
Replacement Parts Lists 7-1
Operator Control Panel 5-3
Reproducibility and Linearity in Manual Mode Test
Operator Radiation Shield, Installing 2-14
4-39
Optical Density Verification 4-45
Reproducibility in Auto-Filter Mode Test 4-41
P Reproducibility in Auto-kV Mode Test 4-41
Parts Lists 7-1 Reproducibility in Auto-Time Mode Test 4-40
Patient Face Shield 6-32 Required Tools and Equipment 1-2
Patient Handle 6-33 Room Planning 2-1
Performance Test S
Large Focal Spot (Mo) 4-24
S2 DIP Switches 4-2
Large Focal Spot (Rh) 4-25
Safety 1-3
Small Spot (Mo) 4-29
Electrical 1-3
Small Spot (Rh) 4-30
External Indicators 1-5
Performance Tests 4-36
Interlocks 1-5
Planning the Room 2-1
Isolation Integrity 1-4
Post-Startup Tests 3-3
Mechanical 1-4
C-arm 3-4
Radiation 1-4
Emergency Off Switches 3-3
Securing System in Position 2-10
Tubehead and Footswitches 3-6
Service Manual, Using P-ix
Power
Setting
Cable Connection 2-5
Exposure Technique Defaults 3-15
Control Board 6-2
User Defaults 3-14
Distribution 5-4
Setting Defaults 3-1
P/N 9-500-0255 iii

Service Manual
Index
Setting Operational Parameters 2-13 Tools and Equipment, required 1-2

Startup Procedures, Initial 2-13 Troubleshooting 5-3
Startup Sequence 3-2 Tube Voltage, Calibrating 4-9
Symbols, International P-x Tubehead Functions 5-5
System Tubehead/Beam Limiting Components 6-29
Specifications A-1
Uncrating 2-2 U
System Control 5-4 Uncrating the System 2-2
System Data Retrieval 5-12 Unit Measurements A-2
System Description 1-6 Unpacking Instructions 2-2
Control Panel 1-8 Uploading Calibration Data 5-14
Gantry and C-arm 1-6 User Defaults, Setting 3-14
System Installation 2-1, 2-4 Using the Service Manual P-ix
System Level Functional Test 4-45
System Startup 3-2
W
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes, Definitions P-x
T
Technical References B-1
X
Test mA, Calibrating 4-12 X-ray
Test Points B-1 Field Alignment Verification 4-55
Theory of Operation Footswitch, Installing 2-10
Automatic Exposure Control 5-9 Tube Control 5-6
Exposure Control 5-8 Tubehead Leakage Test 4-47
Mechanical Functions 5-7 X-ray and Light Field Test and Alignment 4-48
Operator Control Panel 5-3 Aperture Adjustment 4-49
Power Distribution 5-4 Auto-Aperture 4-52
System Control 5-4 Beam Alignment Template 4-48
Tubehead Functions 5-5 Exposing and Viewing the X-ray Field 4-49
X-ray Tube Control 5-6
iv P/N 9-500-0255

Affinity Service Manual Rev7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Affinity Service Manual Rev7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Artwork and Signature File for:

9-500-0255 “MANUAL, AFFINITY SERVICE”

Artwork consists of:

• Two hundred and thirty-four (234) 8 ½ inch x 11 inch pages.

REV AUTHORED BY DATE

for Affinity Series Mammography Systems

Part Number 9-500-0255

Part Number 9-500-0255

Table of Contents ................................................................................................. -i

Chapter 3: Functional Tests/Setting Defaults ..................................................... 3-1

6.0 Performance Tests ................................................................................................................4-36

P/N 9-500-0255 iii

Chapter 6: Maintenance—Remove and Replace Procedures ............................. 6-1

Figure 1-1 The Affinity System .......................................................................................................1-1

Figure 4-22 Light Field Edge Contrast Test................................................................................... 4-58

Table P-1 List of Acronyms for Affinity ........................................................................................ P-xi

P/N 9-500-0255 vii

viii P/N 9-500-0255

1.0 Using the Service Manual

Chapter 2: System Installation: This chapter describes unpacking, positioning, and

Chapter 3: Functional Tests/Setting Defaults: This chapter describes performance and

Chapter 5: Maintenance—General: This chapter describes general information in

Chapter 6: Maintenance—Remove and Replace Procedures: This chapter describes the

Appendix A—Specifications: This appendix describes system specifications, including

2.0 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

3.0 International Symbols

Potential Equalization Connection for a conductor other than the Protective

Off Power disconnection from the mains

On Power connection to the mains

WEEE Symbol indicating separate collection for electrical and

Dangerous Voltage Identifies area of potentially lethal voltage

4.0 Acronym and Abbreviation List

xii P/N 9-500-0255

Chapter 1: General Information

1.1 Intended Uses

Figure 1-1: The Affinity System

P/N 9-500-0255 1-1

1.2 Required Tools and Equipment

1-2 P/N 9-500-0255

Warning: Hazardous Material Warning!

• The X-ray tube contains a beryllium window that should not be

2.1 Electrical Safety

Warning: Electrical equipment used in the presence of flammable anesthetics

Warning: Only qualified electronic technicians who are certified and

P/N 9-500-0255 1-3

2.2 Mechanical Safety

2.3 Radiation Safety

2.4 Isolation Integrity

WARNING! To ensure proper isolation, maintain a 1.5 meter distance

1-4 P/N 9-500-0255

2.6 External Indicators

P/N 9-500-0255 1-5

3.0 System Description

3.1 Gantry and C-Arm

1-6 P/N 9-500-0255

Figure 1-2: Affinity Gantry and C-arm

Legend for Figure 1-2

P/N 9-500-0255 1-7

3.2 Control Panel

Legend for Figure 1-3

Figure 1-3: The Control Panel

1-8 P/N 9-500-0255

4.0 Compliance Data

4.1 Compliance Statement